WO2009096685A2 - Led package, and a production method therefor, and a device using the led package - Google Patents

Led package, and a production method therefor, and a device using the led package Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009096685A2
WO2009096685A2 PCT/KR2009/000363 KR2009000363W WO2009096685A2 WO 2009096685 A2 WO2009096685 A2 WO 2009096685A2 KR 2009000363 W KR2009000363 W KR 2009000363W WO 2009096685 A2 WO2009096685 A2 WO 2009096685A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substrate
led package
pattern electrode
base substrate
light emitting
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/KR2009/000363
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Other versions
WO2009096685A3 (en
Inventor
Hyunmin Kim
Seonwook Hwang
Gillsun Lee
Original Assignee
Amoleds Co., Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from KR1020080009216A external-priority patent/KR20090083202A/en
Priority claimed from KR1020080044549A external-priority patent/KR100978614B1/en
Priority claimed from KR1020080066941A external-priority patent/KR20100006810A/en
Application filed by Amoleds Co., Ltd. filed Critical Amoleds Co., Ltd.
Publication of WO2009096685A2 publication Critical patent/WO2009096685A2/en
Publication of WO2009096685A3 publication Critical patent/WO2009096685A3/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L33/00Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
    • H01L33/48Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by the semiconductor body packages
    • H01L33/50Wavelength conversion elements
    • H01L33/505Wavelength conversion elements characterised by the shape, e.g. plate or foil
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colourย 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colourย  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/1336Illuminating devices
    • G02F1/133602Direct backlight
    • G02F1/133603Direct backlight with LEDs
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L33/00Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
    • H01L33/48Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by the semiconductor body packages
    • H01L33/483Containers
    • H01L33/486Containers adapted for surface mounting
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colourย 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colourย  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/1336Illuminating devices
    • G02F1/133614Illuminating devices using photoluminescence, e.g. phosphors illuminated by UV or blue light
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2224/00Indexing scheme for arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies and methods related thereto as covered by H01L24/00
    • H01L2224/01Means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected, e.g. chip-to-package, die-attach, "first-level" interconnects; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L2224/42Wire connectors; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L2224/47Structure, shape, material or disposition of the wire connectors after the connecting process
    • H01L2224/48Structure, shape, material or disposition of the wire connectors after the connecting process of an individual wire connector
    • H01L2224/4805Shape
    • H01L2224/4809Loop shape
    • H01L2224/48091Arched
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L24/00Arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies; Methods or apparatus related thereto
    • H01L24/01Means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected, e.g. chip-to-package, die-attach, "first-level" interconnects; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L24/42Wire connectors; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L24/47Structure, shape, material or disposition of the wire connectors after the connecting process
    • H01L24/48Structure, shape, material or disposition of the wire connectors after the connecting process of an individual wire connector
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2924/00Indexing scheme for arrangements or methods for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies as covered by H01L24/00
    • H01L2924/0001Technical content checked by a classifier
    • H01L2924/00014Technical content checked by a classifier the subject-matter covered by the group, the symbol of which is combined with the symbol of this group, being disclosed without further technical details

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an LED package, a method for manufacturing the same, and an apparatus using the LED package, and more particularly, to an LED package capable of emitting light upward and to the side, a method for manufacturing the same, and an apparatus using the LED package.
  • a backlight unit employed in a flat panel display or the like has edge type (called edge type or side view type) and direct type (direct type or top view) depending on the position of a light source (lamp) (for example, an LED package). Method).
  • the edge type backlight unit is provided with a light source on the side of the optical unit.
  • light sources are arranged in a row under the optical unit to directly emit light.
  • the shape of the lens of the LED package may be changed (processed) to further diffuse outgoing light.
  • the precise processing of the lens is required, not only manufacturing is difficult, but also manufacturing costs are high.
  • the flat panel display includes a pair of side view LED packages 12a and 12b in a row on an upper surface of a bar type base substrate 10.
  • a typical edge type LED package is an LED package with a reflecting plate, which can be easily understood by those in the same industry.
  • the left LED package 12a only emits light in the left direction
  • the right LED package 12b only emits light in the right direction. That is, light is not emitted to the upper surface of the base substrate 10, but only light is emitted in the left direction and the right direction (that is, the lateral direction) of the base substrate 10.
  • the backlight unit as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 uses fewer LED packages than the direct-type backlight unit because light spreads only from side to side to illuminate the screen (not shown).
  • the backlight unit of FIGS. 1 and 2 does not emit light to the upper surface, so when viewed from the front, the shadow unit (also referred to as a dark portion) appears along the long axis of the base substrate 10. This not only degrades the picture quality, but it is also not good visually and reduces the reliability of the product.
  • a direction angle of about 60 degrees to about 80 degrees is obtained when most of the backlight units are not used.
  • hemispherical lenses are additionally provided to widen the orientation angle to approximately 120 degrees.
  • it is necessary to fabricate a lens that is sophisticated enough to obtain a desired orientation angle and it is very difficult to manufacture the lens precisely. And it is difficult to accurately attach the lens to the LED package. If the lens is not correctly attached in place, the desired orientation angle will not be obtained. Even if the lens is separately installed, it is difficult to obtain a direct angle of more than 120 degrees.
  • the batwing characteristic means that the center portion has a shape of a light distribution curve that is recessed to the left and right.
  • the batwing characteristic is also called the side emitting characteristic.
  • the present invention has been proposed to solve the above-mentioned conventional problems, and an object thereof is to provide an LED package and a method of manufacturing the same having a wide orientation angle without using a lens.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a device having a batwing characteristics by using the LED package of the above-described object.
  • the lower surface of the solder pad is formed recessed substrate; A pattern electrode formed on an upper surface of the substrate and electrically connected to the solder pads; A light emitting device mounted on an upper surface of the pattern electrode; And a phosphor block mounted on an upper surface of the substrate to emit light emitted from the light emitting device upwardly and laterally.
  • the solder pad is formed by coating the material of the solder pad on the wall surface of the groove formed on the lower side of the substrate.
  • a conductive pad is formed on the bottom of the substrate, and the conductive pad is electrically connected to the pattern electrode.
  • the phosphor block covers the upper side and the upper side of the light emitting element, and the upper side of the pattern electrode. Alternatively, the phosphor block covers the upper side and the side side of the light emitting element and the pattern electrode.
  • the bottom surface of the plurality of LED packages are opposed to each other, thereby completing the light output module having the batwing characteristics.
  • a structure in which two LED packages of the above-described embodiments are arranged in one set and arranged in a row may be employed in a backlight unit or a lighting device of a flat panel display.
  • an LED package includes: a substrate having inner pads formed therein exposed at both sides; A pattern electrode formed on an upper surface of the substrate and electrically connected to the inner pad; A light emitting device mounted on an upper surface of the pattern electrode; And a phosphor block mounted on an upper surface of the substrate to emit light emitted from the light emitting device upwardly and laterally.
  • a conductive pad is formed on the bottom of the substrate, and the conductive pad is electrically connected to the pattern electrode.
  • solder pad at the bottom of the side of the substrate, the solder pad being electrically connected with the pattern electrode.
  • the solder pad is formed by coating the material of the solder pad on the wall surface of the groove formed on the lower side of the substrate.
  • the phosphor block covers the upper side and the side side of the light emitting element and the pattern electrode.
  • the bottom surface of the plurality of LED packages are opposed to each other, thereby completing the light output module having the batwing characteristics.
  • a structure in which two LED packages of the above-described other embodiments are arranged in one set and arranged in a row may be employed in a backlight unit or a lighting device of a flat panel display.
  • a method of manufacturing an LED package comprising: a base substrate preparing step of preparing a base substrate on which a pattern electrode is formed on an upper surface of each unit device region; A splitting groove forming step of forming a splitting groove at a predetermined depth on a bottom surface of the base substrate along a boundary line between unit device regions; A light emitting device mounting step of mounting a light emitting device on an upper surface of the pattern electrode for each unit device region of the base substrate; Combining the base phosphor blocks on the upper surface of the base substrate on which the light emitting device is mounted to form a laminate; A cutting groove forming step of forming a cutting groove at a predetermined depth along a boundary line between the unit element regions on an upper surface of the laminate; And a separating step of separating the laminate into a plurality of unit elements by using the splitting grooves and the cutting grooves, respectively.
  • the pattern electrodes of each unit device region are separated from each other.
  • the base substrate preparation step forms an inner pad in a direction crossing the pattern electrode in the base substrate, and electrically connects the inner pad and the pattern electrode to each other. In this case, both ends of the inner pad are exposed to both sides of each unit element separated by the separating step.
  • a solder pad may be additionally formed in the lower portion of the side of the substrate, but the solder pad may be electrically connected to the pattern electrode and the inner pad.
  • the LED package can be surface mounted directly or edge type as needed.
  • the backlight unit adopting the LED package which can emit light in the side and the upper side has the effect of the surface light source like the conventional CCFL (cold cathode fluorescent lamp) because the LED package can emit the light in the upward and side directions. You can get it.
  • CCFL cold cathode fluorescent lamp
  • the LED package is manufactured by half sawing method that creates a split groove and a cut groove, thereby easily producing a single reflector-free LED package at high speed. In other words, the time to manufacture the desired finished product is shortened.
  • 1 and 2 are views for explaining the configuration of a general backlight unit.
  • 3 to 5 are views for explaining the configuration of the LED package according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a state diagram of FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a view for explaining a light emitting direction of the LED package according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a view for explaining the orientation angle of the LED package according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a view showing a backlight unit using an LED package according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the LED package according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a perspective view illustrating the remaining parts of the block except for the phosphor block in FIG. 10.
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the combination of FIG.
  • FIG. 13 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing an LED package according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a view showing a light emitting module and a backlight unit in which the light emitting module is installed, which is an example of an application device of the present invention.
  • 15 to 17 are views for explaining the configuration of any one optical module of the light output module of FIG.
  • FIG. 18 is a state diagram of FIG.
  • 19 is a light distribution curve diagram of polar coordinates of the light output module of FIG. 14.
  • 20 is a light distribution curve diagram in Cartesian coordinate form for the light output module of FIG.
  • 21 is a view for explaining the difference between the backlight unit which is an example of the application of the present invention and the conventional backlight unit.
  • the LED package is any SMD type package such as a ceramic package, a plastic package, a lead frame type package, and a plastic + lead frame type package.
  • the LED package is set to be a light source employed in the backlight unit of the flat panel display device and a light source of the lighting device.
  • the lighting device means a reading light, a street lamp, various indoor lights, and other lights that can use an LED package as a light source in addition to a flat panel display device.
  • the application device may be understood as a concept including a backlight unit, a lighting device, a light emitting module, and the like of a flat panel display device.
  • the light emitting module means that two LED packages described in the following embodiments are formed in one set.
  • 3 to 5 are views for explaining the configuration of the LED package according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 6 is a state diagram of FIG.
  • the LED package of the embodiment of the present invention includes the substrate 20, the phosphor block 30, and the LED chip 40.
  • substrate 20 can be any if it can mount the LED chip 40 (light emitting element) at high density.
  • the material of the substrate 20 may include alumina, quartz, calcium zirconate, forsterite, SiC, graphite, fusedsilica, and mullite. Cordierite, zirconia, beryllia, and aluminum nitride, low temperature co-fired ceramic (LTCC), plastics, metals, varistors, and the like.
  • LTCC low temperature co-fired ceramic
  • plastics metals, varistors, and the like.
  • it is best to manufacture using a ZnO series varistor material. This is because varistors of ZnO series have high thermal conductivity.
  • the production of ZnO-based varistor material not only functions as a varistor, but also allows the LED package to be rapidly cooled due to the high thermal conductivity of the varistor itself.
  • the material of the substrate 20 is assumed to be ceramic.
  • the ceramic can be used as a multi-layer ceramic package (MLP) through the firing process by forming a metal conductor wiring pattern thereon.
  • MLP multi-layer ceramic package
  • Pattern electrodes 22 and 24 are formed on the upper surface of the substrate 20.
  • the pattern electrode consists of a cathode electrode 22 and an anode electrode 24 spaced apart from each other.
  • the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 take the form of a lead frame plated with on (Ag).
  • the anode electrode 24 is formed on the substrate 20 so as to be spaced apart from the cathode electrode 22 for electrical insulation.
  • substrate 20 was made rectangular in the figure, it may be square. If the planar shape of the substrate 20 is square, the planar shape of the phosphor block 30 will also be square. As a result of the experiment, it was found that the direction of the orientation is generally larger than the case of the rectangular shape of the plane shape. It is preferable that the plane size (width * length) of the substrate 20 and the plane size (width * length) of the phosphor block 30 are the same. This is to make it easier to place the LED package of the present invention when the edge is disposed.
  • to make the plane size of the substrate 20 and the plane size of the phosphor block 30 identical may be understood to include not only numerically the same but also some errors.
  • a portion of the edges of the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 exposed to the adjacent side surface on the upper surface of the substrate 20 was minimized. This is to minimize the interface separation between the substrate block 20 and the phosphor block 30 that may be generated by performing a process (eg, oven curing) for bonding the phosphor block 30 to the substrate 20 later. For that. That is, the more portions of the edges of the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 that are exposed from the upper surface of the substrate 20 to the adjacent side surfaces, the more likely that the interface separation occurs by the process for bonding the phosphor block 30 and the substrate 20. many. Thus, the interface separation can be minimized by removing the edge portions of each of the cathode electrode 22 and the anode electrode 24.
  • Conductive pads 26 and 28 are formed on the bottom surface of the substrate 20.
  • the conductive pads 26 and 28 are made of a conductive material.
  • the conductive pads 26 and 28 are spaced apart from each other.
  • the conductive pad 26 is connected to the cathode electrode 22 through a through hole 25 penetrating through the substrate 20.
  • the conductive pad 28 is connected to the anode electrode 24 through the through hole 25 penetrating the substrate 20.
  • the through hole 25 is formed by a punching operation.
  • Solder pads 23 are connected to the conductive pads 26 and 28 at the sides of the substrate 20, respectively.
  • the solder pads 23 are coated with Ag, AgPd, Au, or the like.
  • the ratio of Pd is selected in consideration of physical properties with the material of the substrate 20.
  • the reason for using Ag, AgPd, Au is because it reacts well with solder. What is necessary is just to determine the coating material of the solder pad 23 in consideration of each condition.
  • a conductive powder such as Ag, AgPd, Au, etc. is made into a fine powder, mixed with an organic binder, and pasted to form a paste. That is, the method of coating on the wall surface of the solder pad 23 to be formed) may be used.
  • a printing or plating process may be further performed to prevent peeling that may occur in the reflow process after surface mounting of the LED package.
  • solder pads 23 in addition to the coating method described above, it is possible to employ.
  • the material of the solder pad 23 may be completely filled in each groove or a piece of metal of the same size as the groove may be bonded to each groove.
  • the solder pads 23 fall off during sawing for a single piece. Therefore, it is preferable to employ a thin coating method.
  • the material of the solder pad 23 at the position without making a groove in the lower portion of one side of the substrate 20.
  • the LED package may be slightly damaged due to the thickness of the solder pad 23. It is inclined form. The tilted LED package makes it difficult to obtain the desired alignment curve. Therefore, it is more preferable to form a groove in the lower portion of one side of the substrate 20 to form the solder pad 23 in the groove.
  • the conductive pads 26 and 28 on the bottom of the substrate 20 are disposed on the lower PCB substrate (not shown). Soldered).
  • the solder pads 23 may be soldered together.
  • the solder pads 23 provide for ease of soldering.
  • the solder pad 23 on the side of the substrate 20 is soldered to the lower PCB substrate (not shown) even when the LED package of the first embodiment is mounted in an edge type (that is, the LED package of FIG. 6 is laid down 90 degrees). You can. That is, the LED package of the first embodiment can be surface mounted in both a direct type and an edge type.
  • the LED package of the first embodiment can be surface mounted in a direct type and an edge type without forming the conductive pads 26 and 28.
  • the grooves for forming the solder pads 23 may be dug deeper to directly connect the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 and the solder pads 23 through the through holes 25. In this way, the surface mounting in the direct type by the solder pad 23 is possible, and the surface mounting in the edge type is also possible.
  • the LED chip 40 is mounted on the pattern electrode (for example, the cathode electrode 22).
  • the LED chip 40 is electrically connected to the anode electrode 24 through the wire 42.
  • the LED chip 40 and the cathode electrode 22 are insulated by an insulating material. If necessary, the anode electrode may be used as the cathode electrode and the cathode electrode may be replaced with the anode electrode. In this case, the driving power application method may be reversed.
  • the phosphor block 30 is stacked on the upper surface of the substrate 20 on which the LED chip 40 is mounted.
  • the phosphor block 30 may be composed of silicon (or epoxy) without using phosphor or silicon (or epoxy) and diffuser if the LED chip 40 can emit white light.
  • the silicon block may be referred to instead of the phosphor block.
  • the phosphor block 30 is a mixture of yellow phosphor and silicon (or epoxy) if the LED chip 40 emits blue light, for example. It is natural that the type and compounding degree of the phosphor can be sufficiently controlled.
  • the LED package of the first embodiment described above does not have a separate reflector.
  • light emission to the left and right side surfaces (a direction; side) and light emission to the upper surface (b direction; upward) are possible as shown in FIG. 7.
  • the a direction of FIG. 7 is illustrated as meaning only light output toward the left and right sides, it is preferable to include light output toward the short side of the phosphor block 30.
  • the long axis of the LED package 50 is referred to as the X axis
  • the short axis is set to the Y axis
  • the luminance of the X axis and the Y axis is compared with Table 1 below.
  • the luminous intensity of the side light emission relative to the top light emission is about 50%.
  • the X-axis orientation angle is approximately 160 degrees to 170 degrees as in FIG. 8A
  • the Y-axis orientation angle is approximately 140 to 145 degrees as in FIG. 8B.
  • the LED package of the first embodiment has a much larger orientation angle than that of the conventional LED package.
  • the LED package of the first embodiment may also be viewed as having a batwing characteristic. Of course, this is somewhat inferior to FIG. 19 which will be described later.
  • the directivity angle is much wider than that of the conventional LED package.
  • the reflective plate is not used, the structure is very simple compared to the conventional LED package.
  • FIG. 9 is a view illustrating a backlight unit employing an LED package according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the LED package of the above-described first embodiment (that is, the LED package capable of emitting light in the side and upward) can be employed in the backlight unit. That is, the plurality of LED packages 50 are spaced apart from each other at predetermined intervals on the bar type base substrate 10 and are arranged in one line.
  • the LED package 50 that is, the LED package capable of emitting light to the side and upward
  • the LED package 50 is installed on the base substrate 10 as shown in FIG. 9, a smaller number of LED packages can be used than in the related art (FIG. 2). do.
  • light emission toward the side and the upper side is performed together so that shadows (also called dark portions) do not occur along the long axis of the base substrate 10. This not only improves image quality as compared to the conventional art, but also improves the visual quality and reliability of the product.
  • the backlight unit employing the LED package of the first embodiment is an example of the application device in the present invention.
  • LED packages capable of emitting light to the side and the top are arranged one by one, thereby generating shadows (dark portions) on the base substrate even though fewer LED packages are used than in the related art. It won't let you. This improves image quality and product reliability.
  • the LED package In the backlight unit employing the LED package of the first embodiment, the LED package emits light in all directions, thereby obtaining the effect of the surface light source.
  • the LED package of the first embodiment described above can serve as a light source sufficiently for an illumination device or the like, in addition to being employed in the backlight unit of the flat panel display device. Accordingly, it is very effectively used for lighting devices requiring a wide directing angle of 120 degrees or more.
  • protrusions 22a and 24a are formed on both sides of the cathode electrode 22 and the anode electrode 24, respectively (see FIG. 3).
  • the protrusions 22a and 24a are exposed to both sides of the upper surface of the substrate 20, respectively.
  • the protrusions 22a and 24a are used for connecting the plating lines with other LED packages which are positioned next to the corresponding LED packages in the manufacturing process.
  • the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 are plated (for example, silver plated) by an electroplating process utilizing the protrusions 22a and 24a.
  • the pattern electrode is disposed on the side of the substrate 20 except for the protrusions 22a and 24a for the plating process. (22, 24) was not exposed.
  • the LED chip is mounted after first placing a lead frame plate (that is, a plate formed with an electrode shape to be used as a pattern electrode and being silver plated) on a substrate of the original plate. After wire-bonding the LED chip, the phosphor block plate of the original plate is placed by molding or the like. Thereafter, the sawing machine is sawed to complete the single package LED.
  • a lead frame plate that is, a plate formed with an electrode shape to be used as a pattern electrode and being silver plated
  • This pull sawing method requires a lot of work time because the phosphor block 30 and the ceramic substrate 20 must be cut at the same time.
  • working time can be reduced, but this will not only make the cutting surface uneven but also have a high possibility of burrs on the cutting surface.
  • the ceramic is harder than the phosphor, the service life of the blade for sawing is not long. As a result, the requirements of the blades increase, thereby increasing the operating cost.
  • the second embodiment to be described below is characterized by completely eliminating the interface separation between the substrate and the phosphor block, shortening the finished product manufacturing time and extending the service life of the blade.
  • FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the LED package according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a perspective view illustrating the remaining parts of the block except for the phosphor block in FIG. 10.
  • 12 is a perspective view of the combination of FIG.
  • the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those of the above-described first embodiment among the components in FIGS. 10 to 12, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • the LED package of the second embodiment includes the substrate 60, the phosphor block 30, and the LED chip 40.
  • the description of the substrate 60 is the same as that of the substrate 20 of the first embodiment described above.
  • the substrate 60 is formed by stacking a plurality of ceramic sheets 61, 62, 63, 64.
  • the lowermost ceramic sheet 64 two through holes 65 are spaced apart from each other and are formed in the vertical direction.
  • the through hole 65 is formed by a punching operation.
  • Positive (+) and negative (-) conductive pads 68 (68a, 68b) are formed on the bottom of the lowermost ceramic sheet 64 so as to be spaced apart from each other.
  • the conductive pad 68 is made of a conductive material.
  • the conductive pads 68a and 68b are in close contact with the corresponding through holes 65.
  • the ceramic sheet 63 is stacked on the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 64, and two through holes 65 are spaced apart from each other in the ceramic sheet 63 to be formed in the vertical direction.
  • inner pads 67a, 67b and 67 which are thin metal foils, are provided in a direction crossing the pattern electrodes 66a, 66b and 66.
  • One of the two through holes 65 of the ceramic sheet 63 is in contact with the inner pad 67a.
  • the other through hole 65 of the ceramic sheet 63 is in contact with the inner pad 67b.
  • the through holes 65 of the ceramic sheets 63 and 64 are in contact with the through holes facing up and down.
  • the ceramic sheet 62 is laminated on the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 63 in which the inner pads 67a and 67b are in close contact.
  • two through holes 65 are spaced apart from each other and are formed in a vertical direction.
  • the ceramic sheet 61 is laminated on the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 62.
  • two through holes 65 are spaced apart from each other and are formed in a vertical direction.
  • the through holes 65 of the ceramic sheets 61 and 62 are in contact with the through holes facing up and down.
  • the through hole 65 shown in FIG. 10 is filled with a conductive material.
  • the pattern electrode 66 is formed on the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 61.
  • the pattern electrode 66 includes a cathode electrode 66a and an anode electrode 66b spaced apart from each other.
  • the cathode electrode 66a is in contact with one of the two through holes 65 of the ceramic sheet 61, and the anode electrode 66b is in contact with the other through hole 65 of the ceramic sheet 61.
  • the anode electrode 66b is formed spaced apart from the cathode electrode 66a for electrical insulation.
  • the cathode electrode 66a is connected to the inner pad 67a and the conductive pad 68a through the through hole 65.
  • the anode electrode 66b is connected to the inner pad 67b and the conductive pad 68b through the through hole 65. Both ends of the inner pads 67a and 67b are exposed to both sides of the substrate 60.
  • the pattern electrode 66 is plated (for example, silver plated) by an electroplating process utilizing the inner pads 67a and 67b.
  • the pattern electrodes 66a and 66b are not exposed to the side of the LED package as shown in FIG. 12, and both ends of the inner pads 67a and 67b are exposed to both sides of the substrate 60.
  • the pattern electrodes 66a and 66b are not exposed so that the phosphor block 30 and the substrate (when performing a process for bonding the phosphor block 30 and the substrate 60 later (eg, oven curing, etc.) are performed. This is to prevent the interfacial separation between 60). That is, in the first embodiment, there are protrusions 22a and 24a (see FIG. 3), so that the interface separation occurs at the portion of the protrusion. In the second embodiment, since the protrusion is removed, the substrate 60 and the phosphor block 30 are removed. Interfacial separation does not occur in the bonding process of the liver.
  • the inner pads 67a and 67b are mainly used for plating line connection with other adjacent LED packages during the LED package manufacturing process.
  • the lower PCB substrate (not shown) is directed to the lower PCB substrate (not shown) with the inner pads 67a and 67b facing the lower PCB substrate (not shown). May be soldered).
  • the LED package 90 to the direct type and the edge type.
  • the LED package 90 when the LED package 90 is erected and surface mounted, it becomes a direct type, and when it is placed on its surface, it becomes an edge type.
  • the exposed portions of the inner pads 67a and 67b may be too small to solder.
  • the edge-mounted LED package 90 may be kept slightly inclined. Therefore, although not shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, it is more preferable to form the solder pad 23 of the first embodiment on the substrate 60.
  • the phosphor block 30 is stacked on the upper surface of the substrate 60 on which the LED chip 40 is mounted.
  • the LED package according to the second embodiment does not have a separate reflector. Accordingly, when viewed in the upright state as shown in FIG. 7, light exit to the left and right side surfaces (side direction; a direction) and light exit to the upper surface (upward direction; b direction) are possible.
  • the long axis of the LED package of the second embodiment is set to the X axis and the short axis is set to the Y axis, and the luminance of the X axis and the Y axis is compared, the result shown in Table 1 is obtained.
  • the base substrate 600 is prepared.
  • the base substrate 600 is manufactured to a size that can be separated into a plurality of substrates (60).
  • the base phosphor block 300 is stacked on the base substrate 600 and then cut, the base phosphor block 300 is separated into a plurality of LED packages.
  • the separated single package LED is called a unit element, and the area occupied by each unit element is called a unit element region.
  • the preparation of the base substrate 600 includes a plurality of unit device regions, wherein a pattern electrode is formed on the upper surface of each unit device region, and a pad is formed across the pattern electrode. It is to be understood that the base substrates are electrically connected to each other.
  • the process of manufacturing the base substrate 600 is as follows.
  • the predetermined raw material powder is prepared. That is, low-temperature co-fired ceramic (LTCC) raw material powders and multilayer chip capacitor (MLCC) raw material powders prepared by adding various additives to commercially available glass frit are prepared.
  • PVB-based binder (binder) to the prepared raw material powder is measured by about 6wt% relative to the raw material powder and dissolved in toluene / alcohol (toluene / alcohol) solvent (solvent) is added.
  • the mill is then milled and mixed with a ball mill for about 24 hours to produce a slurry.
  • This slurry is produced by a method such as a doctor blade and a plurality of molded sheets (sheets such as the molded sheet 602 of Fig. 13A) of a desired size.
  • a method such as a doctor blade and a plurality of molded sheets (sheets such as the molded sheet 602 of Fig. 13A) of a desired size.
  • sheets such as the molded sheet 602 of Fig. 13A
  • two through holes 65 spaced apart from each other by unit device regions are formed in the vertical direction.
  • the through hole 65 is formed by a punching operation.
  • the conductive material is filled in the through hole 65.
  • the second molded sheet 602 is laminated on the upper surface of the first molded sheet 601 of the lowermost layer as shown in FIG.
  • one molded sheet having a thickness of the combined thickness of the first molded sheet 601 and the second molded sheet 602 may be used.
  • inner pads 671, 672, 673, and 674 which are thin metal foils, are formed on the upper surface of the second molding sheet 602 in the vertical direction. That is, the inner pad 671 covers the through holes 65 vertically arranged on the leftmost side of the upper surface of the second molding sheet 602.
  • the inner pad 672 covers the through holes 65 arranged in a row from the left side to the second length side on the top surface of the second molding sheet 602.
  • the inner pad 673 covers the through holes 65 arranged in a row from the top of the second molding sheet 602 to the third from the left.
  • the inner pad 674 covers the through holes 65 arranged in a row from the top of the second molding sheet 602 to the fourth from the left (ie, the rightmost).
  • the third molding sheet 603 and the fourth molding sheet 604 are sequentially stacked. Thereafter, the laminated plurality of molded sheets is pressed.
  • pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, and 664 are formed on the upper surface of the fourth molding sheet 604.
  • the pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, 664 can be formed by printing the conductive paste using a silk screen. Pattern electrodes 661 and 662 are formed in one unit element region, and pattern electrodes 663 and 664 are formed in one unit element region.
  • the pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, 664 are the pattern electrodes 66 of the completed LED package.
  • the conductive pads 68a and 68b have not been described separately, the conductive pads 68a and 68b may be formed on the bottom surface of the first molding sheet 601 before the following light emitting element mounting operation is performed.
  • the conductive pads 68a and 68b for each LED package after each LED package is manufactured as needed.
  • the formation timings of the conductive pads 68a and 68b may vary depending on the situation.
  • reference numerals for the base substrates are not described in FIG. 13D, the first to fourth molding sheets 601, 602, 603, and 604 may be collectively understood as the base substrate 600.
  • the pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, and 664 are plated (eg, silver plated) by an electroplating process using the inner pads 671, 672, 673, and 674.
  • a splitting groove 70 is formed in the bottom surface of the base substrate as shown in FIG. 13E.
  • the cleavage groove 70 is formed at a predetermined value along a boundary line between the unit device regions in an upward direction from the bottom of the base substrate 600.
  • the splitting groove 70 is formed in an inverted V shape.
  • the inverted V-shaped split groove 70 may be sufficiently formed by using a device that can groove the base substrate 600 made of a ceramic material. It is preferable to form the splitting groove 70 only in the base substrate 600. This is because the rigidity of the base phosphor block 300 and the base substrate 600 are different from each other. It is not so desirable to form the splitting grooves 70 in all of the heterogeneous blocks with one type of groove forming tool.
  • the plating process for the pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, and 664 described above may be performed after the cleavage groove 70 forming process.
  • the base substrate 600 of FIG. 13E is sintered.
  • the base phosphor block 300 is laminated on the upper surface of the fourth molding sheet 604 on which the light emitting device 40 is mounted, for example, by molding or the like, to form the laminate 700. do.
  • the base phosphor block 300 is manufactured to a size that can be separated into a plurality of phosphor blocks 30.
  • the base phosphor block 300 may be manufactured in a desired size by mixing silicon (or epoxy) and phosphor.
  • the base phosphor block 300 may be made of silicon (or epoxy), except for phosphor, if necessary, or may be made of a mixture of silicon (or epoxy) and a diffuser.
  • the base phosphor block 300 and the base substrate 600 are coupled to each other by, for example, oven curing.
  • a dam (not shown) or a mold frame (not shown) having a predetermined height is provided along the edge of the surface of the base substrate 600 to secure a dispensing area, and then a mixture of phosphor and silicon is dispensed. Dispensing in the fencing area.
  • the upper surface of the base substrate 600 is a mold station in which a phosphor layer made of a mixture of phosphor and silicon (part of which becomes a base phosphor block) is formed. Thereafter, for example, an air bubble removing process for the dispensed mixture is performed while oven curing is performed for about 30 minutes at a temperature of approximately 70 ยฐ C.
  • FIG. A laminate 700 such as) is completed.
  • the cutting groove 80 is formed by sawing a predetermined depth along the boundary line between the unit element regions on the upper surface of the stack 700, that is, the upper surface of the base phosphor block 300.
  • the cutting groove 80 is formed to a depth close to the splitting groove 70.
  • the height (depth) of the splitting groove 70 and the depth of the cutting groove 80 are not exemplified because the size of the LED package of the single piece to be completed may be various.
  • the depth enough to be close to the above-described splitting groove 70 is laminated by the splitting groove 70 and the cutting groove 80 by applying mechanical or artificial force to the stack 700 in a subsequent separation process.
  • the sawing speed is not so much as full sawing, but as half sawing (half sawing), so that the sawing speed can be made higher speed (for example, 20 โ‡ 30mm / s or more) to produce a finished product You can shorten the time to. Then, since the sawing is as thin as half sawing, the service life of the blade (not shown) for sawing is longer than in the past. That is, because the base phosphor block 300 which is less rigid than the ceramic base substrate 600 can be sawed at a higher speed, the time required to manufacture the finished product as well as the conventional full sawing can be shortened. The service life of the blade will be extended.
  • sawing for the base phosphor block 300 and the base substrate 600 is performed separately.
  • the sawing operation since the optimum sawing speed may be provided to the base phosphor block 300 and the base substrate 600, the sawing operation may not be performed excessively, and the above-described time reduction and life extension of the blade may be obtained.
  • the unit 700 is formed by the split grooves 70 and the cutting grooves 80 by mechanically or artificially applying a force to the stack 700.
  • Each separate unit element 90 is a reflector-free LED package that is desired to be obtained in the second embodiment.
  • the interface separation phenomenon between the substrate and the phosphor block can be completely eliminated by removing the protrusions in the first embodiment, which are exposed from both sides of the upper surface of the substrate.
  • the sawing speed can be made faster (e.g., 20 to 30 mm / s or more), resulting in a shorter time to manufacture the finished product. . It is not the conventional full sawing method, but the sawing of the thickness as much as half sawing, so that the service life of the blade for sawing is longer than in the past.
  • the LED package of the second embodiment can sufficiently serve as a light source for a flat panel display device and a lighting device, the LED package is effectively used for a flat panel display device and a lighting device requiring a wide directivity angle of 120 degrees or more.
  • FIG. 14 is a view showing a light emitting module and a backlight unit in which the light emitting module is installed, which is an example of an application device of the present invention.
  • the light output module 54 is characterized in that it has a wider direct angle than the direct angle of the conventional LED package, as well as a direct angle having a batwing characteristic (or side emitting characteristic). To implement this, the light output module 54 sets two light modules 50 and 52 into one set.
  • the optical modules 50 and 52 are mentioned later.
  • the optical module here may be understood as the LED package of the first or second embodiment described above.
  • the light output module 54 is installed in the backlight unit, for example.
  • the bottom surface of the first optical module 50 and the bottom surface of the second optical module 52 are installed to face each other.
  • 15 to 17 are views for explaining the configuration of any one optical module of the light output module of FIG. 18 is a state diagram of FIG. Since the first optical module 50 and the second optical module 52 constituting the light output module are configured in the same manner, the configuration of the first optical module 50 will be described below.
  • the 2nd optical module 52 can fully grasp
  • the first optical module 50 includes a substrate 20, a phosphor block 30, and an LED chip 40.
  • the protrusions 22a and 24a of the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 are slightly removed.
  • Those skilled in the art can easily infer the configuration and manufacturing process of the first optical module 50 based on the description of the first and second embodiments described above. And it is possible to fully remove the protrusions 22a and 24a by a well-known technique for those skilled in the same industry.
  • the first optical module 50 in FIGS. 15 to 18 may be regarded as substantially the same as the LED package of the first or second embodiment.
  • the first optical module 50 in the standing state as shown in Figure 7 can be emitted to the left and right side (a direction; lateral direction) and the light output to the upper surface (b direction; upward direction).
  • the long axis of the first optical module 50 is set as the X axis and the short axis is set as the Y axis, and the luminance of the X axis and the Y axis is compared, the result shown in Table 1 is obtained.
  • the light output module 54 may lay the first optical module 50 and the second optical module 52 having about 50% of the luminous intensity of the upper side emission compared to the upper side emission. In this way, it is as shown in FIG. That is, when arranged as shown in FIG. 14, the light output module 54 may emit light in the upward direction and the lateral direction.
  • the upper surface of the first optical module 50 and the second optical module 52 is a side surface, so that the light exit module 54 The luminance of the lateral light emission becomes larger. This results in batwing characteristics.
  • the light distribution module in polar coordinates based on a data sheet obtained by measuring the light output module 54 implemented as shown in FIG. 14 by using a goniometer (eg, OL770 goniometer) is shown in FIG. 19.
  • a light distribution curve in the form of a rectangular coordinate based on a data sheet obtained by measuring the light output module 54 implemented as shown in FIG. 14 using a goniometer (eg, OL770 goniometer) is shown in FIG. 20.
  • 19 and 20 it can be seen that the light output module 54 has a wide direct angle of about 170 degrees. 19 and 20, the center portion is pitted and shows a direction angle characteristic spreading left and right, which is referred to as a batwing characteristic or a side emitting characteristic.
  • the view angle is defined as 1 or 100% of the center point or the point with the highest brightness, and reaches a range of 50% relative to the center or the point with the highest brightness. it means.
  • the light output module 54 has a wider direct angle as well as a direct angle having a batwing characteristic compared to the direct angle of the conventional LED package.
  • FIG. 21 is a view for explaining the difference between the backlight unit which is an example of the application of the present invention and the conventional backlight unit.
  • (a) is a backlight unit according to the embodiment of the present invention in which the light output module 54 is installed, and (b) is a conventional backlight unit.
  • FIG. 21 (b) shows that when two LED packages (ie, only one light exit in one direction of the package structure) are disposed side by side as in the light exit module of the present invention, the light exit only in the left and right sides. Is done.
  • the backlight unit according to the embodiment of the present invention in which the light output module 54 is installed, emits light in the upward direction and the left and right sides, and the conventional backlight unit emits light only in the left and right sides. .
  • Conventional backlight units do not emit light in the upward direction so that shading (also called dark portions) occurs along the long axis of the base substrate (ie, between two LED packages).
  • the light emitted upward from the first optical module and the second optical module are mixed with each other so that shading does not occur.
  • This not only improves image quality as compared to the conventional art, but also improves the visual quality and reliability of the product.
  • the arrangement structure as shown in FIG. 21A is closer to the surface light source as compared with the arrangement as shown in FIG. 9.
  • the light emitting module is adopted in the backlight unit, it can be sufficiently employed in the lighting device that requires a light source requiring a directing angle having the batwing characteristics.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Led Device Packages (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides an LED package having a wide directivity angle even without the use of a lens, a production method for the same, and a device arranged in such a way as to have a batwing characteristic by using such LEDs. The LED package provided by the present invention comprises: a substrate, of which the lower parts of the side surfaces are formed with recessed solder pads; a pattern electrode which is formed on the upper surface of the substrate and which is electrically connected with the solder pads; a light-emitting element mounted on the upper surface of the pattern electrode; and a fluorescent block which is installed on the upper surface of the substrate and which is for the sideways and upwards emission of the light emitted from the light-emitting element. When the present invention is employed, the directivity angle is greatly widened as compared with a conventional LED package even without the use of a lens since the light from the light-emitting element is emitted upwards and sideways through the fluorescent block. A directivity angle with a batwing characteristic can be obtained if two LED packages, which can emit light sideways and upwards, are provided with their floor surfaces facing each other.

Description

์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€ ๊ทธ์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ• ๋ฐ ๊ทธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•œ ์žฅ์น˜LED package, manufacturing method thereof, and apparatus using the LED package
๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์€ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€ ๊ทธ์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ• ๋ฐ ๊ทธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•œ ์žฅ์น˜์— ๊ด€ํ•œ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ, ๋ณด๋‹ค ์ƒ์„ธํ•˜๊ฒŒ๋Š” ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€ ๊ทธ์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ• ๋ฐ ๊ทธ๋Ÿฌํ•œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•œ ์žฅ์น˜์— ๊ด€ํ•œ ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‹ค.The present invention relates to an LED package, a method for manufacturing the same, and an apparatus using the LED package, and more particularly, to an LED package capable of emitting light upward and to the side, a method for manufacturing the same, and an apparatus using the LED package.
์—˜์ด๋””(LED) ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ํ˜„์žฌ ์‘์šฉ(application) ๋™ํ–ฅ์€ ์ „์ž๊ธฐ๊ธฐ์˜ ๋‹จ์ˆœํ•œ ์ธ๋””์ผ€์ดํ„ฐ(indicator)์—์„œ ๋ชจ๋ฐ”์ผ ํฐ์˜ ํ”Œ๋ž˜์‰ฌ ๋žจํ”„๋ฅผ ๊ฑฐ์ณ ๊ฐ„์ ‘์กฐ๋ช…, LCD TV์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋กœ ์ง„ํ–‰๋˜๊ณ  ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋” ๋‚˜์•„๊ฐ€์„œ๋Š” ์ง์ ‘์กฐ๋ช…์œผ๋กœ ์ง„ํ–‰๋  ๊ฐ€๋Šฅ์„ฑ์ด ๋†’๋‹ค.The current application trend of LED packages is moving from simple indicators of electronic devices to flash lamps of mobile phones to indirect lighting and backlight units of LCD TVs. Furthermore, it is likely to proceed directly to lighting.
ํ†ต์ƒ์ ์œผ๋กœ, ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜ ๋“ฑ์— ์ฑ„์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ๊ด‘์›(๋žจํ”„)(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€)์˜ ์œ„์น˜์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์—์ง€ํ˜•(edge type๋ฐฉ์‹ ๋˜๋Š” side view๋ฐฉ์‹์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•จ) ๋ฐ ์งํ•˜ํ˜•(direct type๋ฐฉ์‹ ๋˜๋Š” top view๋ฐฉ์‹์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•จ)์œผ๋กœ ํฌ๊ฒŒ ๊ตฌ๋ถ„๋œ๋‹ค. ์—์ง€ํ˜• ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ๊ด‘ํ•™ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์— ๊ด‘์›์ด ์„ค์น˜๋œ๋‹ค. ์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ๊ด‘ํ•™ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ๊ด‘์›์ด ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋˜์–ด ์ง์ ‘ ์ƒ๋ถ€๋กœ ๊ด‘์„ ์ถœ์‚ฌํ•œ๋‹ค. Typically, a backlight unit employed in a flat panel display or the like has edge type (called edge type or side view type) and direct type (direct type or top view) depending on the position of a light source (lamp) (for example, an LED package). Method). The edge type backlight unit is provided with a light source on the side of the optical unit. In the direct type backlight unit, light sources are arranged in a row under the optical unit to directly emit light.
ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜์— ์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋ฅผ ์ง์ ‘ ์„ค์น˜ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—๋Š” ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ํ™”์†Œ๋ณ„๋กœ ํ•˜๋‚˜์”ฉ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์„ค์น˜ํ•ด์•ผ ๋˜๋ฏ€๋กœ, ๋งค์šฐ ๋งŽ์€ ์ˆ˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•ด์•ผ ๋œ๋‹ค๋Š” ๋ฌธ์ œ๊ฐ€ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํŠนํžˆ, ์—˜์ด๋””์—์„œ ์ถœ์‚ฌ๋˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์€ ์ง์ง„์„ฑ์ด ๊ฐ•ํ•˜๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์— ์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ด‘์ด ์—˜์ด๋””์˜ ์ •๋ฉด ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์ง‘์ค‘ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒฝํ–ฅ์ด ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋กœ ์ธํ•ด, ์•ก์ •ํ‘œ์‹œํŒจ๋„์— ๊ด‘์„ ์ „์ฒด์ ์œผ๋กœ ๊ณ ๋ฅด๊ฒŒ ์ž…์‚ฌ์‹œํ‚ค๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ํ™•์‚ฐํŒ ๋ฐ ํ™•์‚ฐ์‹œํŠธ ๋“ฑ์˜ ๊ด‘ํ•™์‹œํŠธ๋“ค์ด ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋œ๋‹ค. ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ๋ณด๋‹ค ์Šฌ๋ฆผํ™”ํ•˜๊ณ  ๋ถ€ํ”ผ ๋ฐ ๋ฌด๊ฒŒ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ์†Œ์‹œํ‚ค๋ ค๋Š” ์ตœ๊ทผ์˜ ๊ฒฝํ–ฅ์— ๋น„์ถ”์–ด ๋ณผ ๋•Œ, ๊ด‘ํ•™์‹œํŠธ๋“ค์„ ์ถ”๊ฐ€์ ์œผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜๋Š” ์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋ฅผ ์ฑ„์šฉํ•œ ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜๋Š” ์Šฌ๋ฆผํ™”์— ํ•œ๊ณ„๊ฐ€ ์žˆ๋‹ค. In case of installing the direct type backlight unit directly on the flat panel display device, one LED package must be installed for each pixel, and thus, a large number of LED packages must be used. In particular, since the light emitted from the LED has a strong straightness, the emitted light tends to concentrate in the front direction of the LED. Therefore, optical sheets such as a diffusion plate and a diffusion sheet are additionally used in order to uniformly inject light into the liquid crystal display panel as a whole. In light of recent trends toward slimmer display devices and reduced volume and weight, display devices employing direct type backlight units that additionally use optical sheets have limitations in slimming.
ํ•œํŽธ์œผ๋กœ๋Š”, ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์˜ ํ˜•์ƒ์„ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ(๊ฐ€๊ณต)์‹œ์ผœ์„œ ์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ด‘์„ ๋ณด๋‹ค ํ™•์‚ฐ์‹œํ‚ค๊ธฐ๋„ ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—๋Š” ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์ •๋ฐ€ํ•œ ๊ฐ€๊ณต์ด ํ•„์š”ํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ ์ œ์ž‘์ด ์–ด๋ ต๋‹ค๋Š” ๋ฌธ์ œ์ ์ด ์žˆ์„ ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ์ œ์ž‘ ๋‹จ๊ฐ€ ์—ญ์‹œ ๋†’๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. On the other hand, the shape of the lens of the LED package may be changed (processed) to further diffuse outgoing light. In this case, since the precise processing of the lens is required, not only manufacturing is difficult, but also manufacturing costs are high.
๊ทธ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜๋Š” ๋„ 1 ๋ฐ ๋„ 2์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋ฐ”(bar) ํƒ€์ž…์˜ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(10)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํ•œ ์Œ์˜ ์—์ง€ํ˜•(side view)์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(12a, 12b)๋ฅผ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์น˜์‹œํ‚จ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋ฅผ ๋งŽ์ด ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•œ๋‹ค. ํ†ต์ƒ์˜ ์—์ง€ํ˜•์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌํŒ์„ ๊ฐ–์ถ˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋กœ์„œ, ๋™์ข…์—…๊ณ„์— ์ข…์‚ฌํ•˜๋Š” ์ž๋ผ๋ฉด ์‰ฝ๊ฒŒ ์•Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‹ค.Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the flat panel display includes a pair of side view LED packages 12a and 12b in a row on an upper surface of a bar type base substrate 10. Use a lot of backlight unit. A typical edge type LED package is an LED package with a reflecting plate, which can be easily understood by those in the same industry.
๋„ 2์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์˜ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์ขŒ์ธก์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(12a)๋Š” ์ขŒ์ธก ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋งŒ์„ ํ–‰ํ•˜๊ณ , ์šฐ์ธก์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(12b)๋Š” ์šฐ์ธก ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋งŒ์„ ํ–‰ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(10)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ๋Š” ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์ด ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง€์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ  ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(10)์˜ ์ขŒ์ธก ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ ๋ฐ ์šฐ์ธก ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ(์ฆ‰, ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋งŒ์ด ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง„๋‹ค. In the case of the backlight unit of Fig. 2, the left LED package 12a only emits light in the left direction, and the right LED package 12b only emits light in the right direction. That is, light is not emitted to the upper surface of the base substrate 10, but only light is emitted in the left direction and the right direction (that is, the lateral direction) of the base substrate 10.
๋„ 1 ๋ฐ ๋„ 2์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ๋น›์ด ์ขŒ์šฐ๋กœ๋งŒ ํผ์ ธ์„œ ํ™”๋ฉด(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์„ ์ „์ฒด์ ์œผ๋กœ ๋น„์ถ”๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฏ€๋กœ ์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์ ์€ ์ˆ˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•œ๋‹ค.The backlight unit as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 uses fewer LED packages than the direct-type backlight unit because light spreads only from side to side to illuminate the screen (not shown).
๊ทธ๋Ÿฌ๋‚˜, ๋„ 1 ๋ฐ ๋„ 2์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ์ƒ๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์ด ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง€์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฏ€๋กœ ์ •๋ฉด์—์„œ ๋ฐ”๋ผ๋ณด์•˜์„ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(10)์˜ ์žฅ์ถ•์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์Œ์˜(์•”(ๆš—)๋ถ€๋ผ๊ณ ๋„ ํ•จ)์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•œ ๊ฒƒ์ฒ˜๋Ÿผ ๋ณด์ธ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Š” ํ™”์งˆ์„ ์ €ํ•˜์‹œํ‚ฌ ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ์‹œ๊ฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ๋„ ์ข‹์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ  ์ œํ’ˆ์˜ ์‹ ๋ขฐ์„ฑ์„ ๋–จ์–ด๋œจ๋ฆฌ๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. However, the backlight unit of FIGS. 1 and 2 does not emit light to the upper surface, so when viewed from the front, the shadow unit (also referred to as a dark portion) appears along the long axis of the base substrate 10. This not only degrades the picture quality, but it is also not good visually and reduces the reliability of the product.
๋˜ํ•œ, ๋„ 1 ๋ฐ ๋„ 2์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์„ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ ๋Œ€๋ถ€๋ถ„ ๋Œ€๋žต 60๋„ ~ 80๋„ ์ •๋„์˜ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์–ป๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋ž˜์„œ, ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๋Œ€๋žต 120๋„ ์ •๋„๋กœ ๋„“ํžˆ๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ๋ฐ˜๊ตฌ ํ˜•์ƒ์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ๋ถ€์ˆ˜์ ์œผ๋กœ ์„ค์น˜ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์›ํ•˜๋Š” ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์–ป์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์„ ์ •๋„์˜ ์ •๊ตํ•œ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ์ œ์ž‘ํ•ด์•ผ ๋˜๋Š”๋ฐ, ์ •๊ตํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ์ œ์ž‘ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด ๋งค์šฐ ์–ด๋ ต๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์— ์ •ํ™•ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋ถ€์ฐฉ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด ์–ด๋ ต๋‹ค. ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๊ฐ€ ์ •ํ™•ํžˆ ์ œ์œ„์น˜์— ๋ถ€์ฐฉ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š์€ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—๋Š” ์›ํ•˜๋Š” ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์–ป์„ ์ˆ˜ ์—†๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ๋ณ„๋„๋กœ ์„ค์น˜ํ•˜์˜€๋‹ค๊ณ  ํ•˜๋”๋ผ๋„ 120๋„ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์–ป๊ธฐ๊ฐ€ ์–ด๋ ต๋‹ค.In addition, in the backlight unit of FIGS. 1 and 2, a direction angle of about 60 degrees to about 80 degrees is obtained when most of the backlight units are not used. Thus, hemispherical lenses are additionally provided to widen the orientation angle to approximately 120 degrees. In this case, it is necessary to fabricate a lens that is sophisticated enough to obtain a desired orientation angle, and it is very difficult to manufacture the lens precisely. And it is difficult to accurately attach the lens to the LED package. If the lens is not correctly attached in place, the desired orientation angle will not be obtained. Even if the lens is separately installed, it is difficult to obtain a direct angle of more than 120 degrees.
์š”์ฆ˜, ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜ ๋ฐ ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜ ๋“ฑ์˜ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ๋ถ„์•ผ์—์„œ๋Š” 120๋„ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์š”๊ตฌํ•˜๋Š” ์ถ”์„ธ์ธ๋ฐ, ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๊ธฐ์กด์˜ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ๋กœ๋Š” 120๋„ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์ถฉ์กฑ์‹œ์ผœ ์ฃผ์ง€ ๋ชปํ•˜๋Š” ์‹ค์ •์ด๋‹ค.Nowadays, in the technical fields such as flat panel display devices and lighting devices, a wide direction angle of 120 degrees or more is required. However, the conventional technology described above does not satisfy the wide angle of view of 120 degrees or more.
๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ๋” ๋‚˜์•„๊ฐ€ ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜ ๋ฐ ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜ ๋“ฑ์˜ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ๋ถ„์•ผ์—์„œ๋Š” ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™(batwing) ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ์ง€๋‹Œ ๊ด‘์›์„ ์š”๊ตฌํ•˜๊ณ  ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์ด๋ผ ํ•จ์€ ์ค‘์•™๋ถ€๊ฐ€ ์›€ํ‘น ๋“ค์–ด๊ฐ€๊ณ  ์ขŒ์šฐ์ธก์œผ๋กœ ๋ฒŒ์–ด์ง„ ๋ฐฐ๊ด‘๊ณก์„ ์˜ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ์ง€๋‹Œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์€ ์‚ฌ์ด๋“œ ์—๋ฏธํŒ…(side emitting) ํŠน์„ฑ์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ๋ถˆ๋ฆฌ์šฐ๊ธฐ๋„ ํ•œ๋‹ค.Further, in the technical field, such as a flat panel display device and a lighting device, there is a need for a light source having batwing characteristics. The batwing characteristic means that the center portion has a shape of a light distribution curve that is recessed to the left and right. The batwing characteristic is also called the side emitting characteristic.
์ด๋ฅผ ์œ„ํ•ด, ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์— ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ๋ถ€์ฐฉํ•˜๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ์˜ ํ˜•์ƒ์„ ๋ณ€๊ฒฝ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋“ฑ์˜ ๋…ธ๋ ฅ๋“ค์ด ์žˆ์–ด ์™”์œผ๋‚˜, ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—๋Š” ์•ž์„œ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•œ ๋ฌธ์ œ๋“ค์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋œ๋‹ค. To this end, efforts have been made to attach a separate lens to the LED package or to change the shape of the lens, but in this case, the problems described above occur.
๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐํ•œ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ๋ฌธ์ œ์ ์„ ํ•ด๊ฒฐํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด ์ œ์•ˆ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ, ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ ์„œ๋„ ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๊ฐ–๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€ ๋ฐ ๊ทธ์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์ œ๊ณตํ•จ์— ๊ทธ ๋ชฉ์ ์ด ์žˆ๋‹ค.The present invention has been proposed to solve the above-mentioned conventional problems, and an object thereof is to provide an LED package and a method of manufacturing the same having a wide orientation angle without using a lens.
๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ๋ชฉ์ ์€ ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๋ชฉ์ ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ๊ฐ–๋„๋ก ํ•œ ์žฅ์น˜๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณตํ•จ์— ์žˆ๋‹ค.Another object of the present invention is to provide a device having a batwing characteristics by using the LED package of the above-described object.
์ƒ๊ธฐ์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ๋ชฉ์ ์„ ๋‹ฌ์„ฑํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์–‘ํƒœ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š”, ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ์˜ค๋ชฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๊ธฐํŒ; ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๋˜ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ์™€ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน; ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ์‹ค์žฅ๋œ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž; ๋ฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํƒ‘์žฌ๋˜์–ด ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž์—์„œ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋œ ๊ด‘์„ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ํฌํ•จํ•œ๋‹ค.In order to achieve the above object, the LED package according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the lower surface of the solder pad is formed recessed substrate; A pattern electrode formed on an upper surface of the substrate and electrically connected to the solder pads; A light emitting device mounted on an upper surface of the pattern electrode; And a phosphor block mounted on an upper surface of the substrate to emit light emitted from the light emitting device upwardly and laterally.
์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ™ˆ์˜ ๋ฒฝ๋ฉด์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ์˜ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๊ฐ€ ์ฝ”ํŒ…๋˜์–ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค.The solder pad is formed by coating the material of the solder pad on the wall surface of the groove formed on the lower side of the substrate.
๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์—๋Š” ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๊ณ , ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค.A conductive pad is formed on the bottom of the substrate, and the conductive pad is electrically connected to the pattern electrode.
ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์€ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์„ ๋ฎ์Œ๊ณผ ๋”๋ถˆ์–ด ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์„ ๋ฎ๋Š”๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅด๊ฒŒ๋Š”, ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์€ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž ๋ฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์„ ๋ฎ๋Š”๋‹ค.The phosphor block covers the upper side and the upper side of the light emitting element, and the upper side of the pattern electrode. Alternatively, the phosphor block covers the upper side and the side side of the light emitting element and the pattern electrode.
์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์–‘ํƒœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์ƒ์— ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ ์„ค์น˜์‹œํ‚ค๋˜, ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์ด ์„œ๋กœ ๋Œ€ํ–ฅ๋˜๋„๋ก ํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ, ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ์ง€๋‹Œ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์ด ์™„์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์–‘ํƒœ์˜ ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์„ธํŠธ๋กœ ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด์‹œํ‚จ ๊ตฌ์กฐ๋ฅผ ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ ๋˜๋Š” ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜์— ์ฑ„์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค.By installing a plurality of LED packages of the above-described embodiments on the base substrate, the bottom surface of the plurality of LED packages are opposed to each other, thereby completing the light output module having the batwing characteristics. In addition, a structure in which two LED packages of the above-described embodiments are arranged in one set and arranged in a row may be employed in a backlight unit or a lighting device of a flat panel display.
๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์‹ค์‹œ์–‘ํƒœ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š”, ๋‚ด๋ถ€์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ์–‘ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋œ ๊ธฐํŒ; ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๋˜ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ์™€ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน; ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ์‹ค์žฅ๋œ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž; ๋ฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํƒ‘์žฌ๋˜์–ด ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž์—์„œ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋œ ๊ด‘์„ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ํฌํ•จํ•œ๋‹ค.According to another embodiment of the present invention, an LED package includes: a substrate having inner pads formed therein exposed at both sides; A pattern electrode formed on an upper surface of the substrate and electrically connected to the inner pad; A light emitting device mounted on an upper surface of the pattern electrode; And a phosphor block mounted on an upper surface of the substrate to emit light emitted from the light emitting device upwardly and laterally.
๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์—๋Š” ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๊ณ , ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค.A conductive pad is formed on the bottom of the substrate, and the conductive pad is electrically connected to the pattern electrode.
๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ์˜ค๋ชฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋ฅผ ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋กœ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ , ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค.And further comprising a recessed solder pad at the bottom of the side of the substrate, the solder pad being electrically connected with the pattern electrode.
์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ™ˆ์˜ ๋ฒฝ๋ฉด์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ์˜ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๊ฐ€ ์ฝ”ํŒ…๋˜์–ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค.The solder pad is formed by coating the material of the solder pad on the wall surface of the groove formed on the lower side of the substrate.
ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์€ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž ๋ฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์„ ๋ฎ๋Š”๋‹ค.The phosphor block covers the upper side and the side side of the light emitting element and the pattern electrode.
์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์‹ค์‹œ์–‘ํƒœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์ƒ์— ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ ์„ค์น˜์‹œํ‚ค๋˜, ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์ด ์„œ๋กœ ๋Œ€ํ–ฅ๋˜๋„๋ก ํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ, ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ์ง€๋‹Œ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์ด ์™„์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์‹ค์‹œ์–‘ํƒœ์˜ ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์„ธํŠธ๋กœ ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด์‹œํ‚จ ๊ตฌ์กฐ๋ฅผ ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ ๋˜๋Š” ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜์— ์ฑ„์šฉํ•  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค.By installing a plurality of LED packages of the other embodiments described above on the base substrate, the bottom surface of the plurality of LED packages are opposed to each other, thereby completing the light output module having the batwing characteristics. In addition, a structure in which two LED packages of the above-described other embodiments are arranged in one set and arranged in a row may be employed in a backlight unit or a lighting device of a flat panel display.
๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์–‘ํƒœ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์€, ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๋ณ„๋กœ, ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์„ ์ค€๋น„ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ ์ค€๋น„ ๋‹จ๊ณ„; ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์— ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ฒฝ๊ณ„์„ ์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ์„ ์†Œ์ • ๊นŠ์ด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ ํ˜•์„ฑ ๋‹จ๊ณ„; ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๋ณ„๋กœ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž๋ฅผ ํƒ‘์žฌํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž ํƒ‘์žฌ ๋‹จ๊ณ„; ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž๊ฐ€ ํƒ‘์žฌ๋œ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ์ ์ธต์‹œ์ผœ ์ ์ธต์ฒด๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ ๋‹จ๊ณ„; ์ ์ธต์ฒด์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ฒฝ๊ณ„์„ ์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ์„ ์†Œ์ • ๊นŠ์ด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ ํ˜•์„ฑ ๋‹จ๊ณ„; ๋ฐ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ๊ณผ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ์„ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ ์ธต์ฒด๋ฅผ ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž๋กœ ๊ฐ๊ฐ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌํ•˜๋Š” ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ๋‹จ๊ณ„๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•œ๋‹ค.According to an aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of manufacturing an LED package, comprising: a base substrate preparing step of preparing a base substrate on which a pattern electrode is formed on an upper surface of each unit device region; A splitting groove forming step of forming a splitting groove at a predetermined depth on a bottom surface of the base substrate along a boundary line between unit device regions; A light emitting device mounting step of mounting a light emitting device on an upper surface of the pattern electrode for each unit device region of the base substrate; Combining the base phosphor blocks on the upper surface of the base substrate on which the light emitting device is mounted to form a laminate; A cutting groove forming step of forming a cutting groove at a predetermined depth along a boundary line between the unit element regions on an upper surface of the laminate; And a separating step of separating the laminate into a plurality of unit elements by using the splitting grooves and the cutting grooves, respectively.
๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ ์ค€๋น„ ๋‹จ๊ณ„๋Š” ๊ฐ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๋ผ๋ฆฌ ์„œ๋กœ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜๊ฒŒ ํ•œ๋‹ค.In the preparing of the base substrate, the pattern electrodes of each unit device region are separated from each other.
๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ ์ค€๋น„ ๋‹จ๊ณ„๋Š” ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ๋‚ด๋ถ€์— ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์„ ๊ฐ€๋กœ์ง€๋ฅด๋Š” ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๊ณ , ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ์™€ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์„ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์„œ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ์‹œํ‚จ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ๋‹จ๊ณ„์— ์˜ํ•ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋œ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž์˜ ์–‘ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ์˜ ์–‘๋‹จ์ด ๋…ธ์ถœ๋œ๋‹ค.The base substrate preparation step forms an inner pad in a direction crossing the pattern electrode in the base substrate, and electrically connects the inner pad and the pattern electrode to each other. In this case, both ends of the inner pad are exposed to both sides of each unit element separated by the separating step.
๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ ์ค€๋น„ ๋‹จ๊ณ„๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋ฅผ ์˜ค๋ชฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋˜, ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋ฅผ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ์™€ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์„œ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ์‹œ์ผœ๋„ ๋œ๋‹ค.In the base substrate preparation step, a solder pad may be additionally formed in the lower portion of the side of the substrate, but the solder pad may be electrically connected to the pattern electrode and the inner pad.
์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์–‘ํƒœ๋“ค์˜ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅด๋ฉด ํ•˜๊ธฐ์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ํšจ๊ณผ๊ฐ€ ์žˆ๋‹ค.According to the present invention of these embodiments, the following effects are obtained.
1) ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž์˜ ๊ด‘์„ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์‹œํ‚ค๋ฏ€๋กœ ๋ Œ์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ ์„œ๋„ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์ด ํ›จ์”ฌ ๋„“๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. 1) Since the light of the light emitting device is emitted upward and laterally through the phosphor block, the directivity angle is much wider than that of the conventional LED package without using a lens.
2) ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌํŒ์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฏ€๋กœ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์— ๋น„ํ•ด ๊ตฌ์กฐ๊ฐ€ ๋งค์šฐ ๊ฐ„๋‹จํ•˜๋‹ค.2) Since the reflector is not used, the structure is very simple compared to the conventional LED package.
3) ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ๋ถ€์œ„๋ฅผ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”์‹œํ‚ด์œผ๋กœ์จ, ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก๊ณผ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ณต์ •์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•จ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜๋Š” ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ํšจ๊ณผ๊ฐ€ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•œํŽธ์œผ๋กœ๋Š”, ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์ด ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ฒŒ ํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก๊ณผ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ณต์ •์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•จ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜๋Š” ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์™„์ „ํžˆ ์ œ๊ฑฐํ•˜๋Š” ํšจ๊ณผ๊ฐ€ ์žˆ๋‹ค3) By minimizing the portion of the pattern electrode exposed to the side of the LED package, there is an effect of minimizing the interface separation generated by performing the process for bonding the phosphor block and the substrate. On the other hand, since the pattern electrode is not exposed to the side of the LED package, there is an effect of completely removing the interfacial separation generated by performing the process for bonding the phosphor block and the substrate.
4) ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ํ•„์š”์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋˜๋Š” ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅ์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์–ด์„œ ๋งค์šฐ ํšจ์œจ์ ์ด๋‹ค.4) It is very efficient because the LED package can be surface mounted directly or edge type as needed.
5) ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์— ์ฑ„์šฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ์ข…๋ž˜์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์ ์€ ์ˆ˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜๊ณ ์„œ๋„ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์— ์Œ์˜(์•”๋ถ€)์„ ๋ฐœ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ค์ง€ ์•Š๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Š” ํ™”์งˆ ๋ฐ ์ œํ’ˆ์˜ ์‹ ๋ขฐ์„ฑ์„ ํ–ฅ์ƒ์‹œํ‚จ๋‹ค. 5) When LED packages capable of emitting light to the side and upward are employed in the backlight unit, shadows (dark areas) are not generated on the base substrate even though fewer LED packages are used than in the prior art. This improves image quality and product reliability.
6) ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ฑ„์šฉํ•œ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๊ฐ€ ์ƒ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ CCFL(๋ƒ‰์Œ๊ทน ํ˜•๊ด‘๋žจํ”„)๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์€ ๋ฉด๊ด‘์›์˜ ํšจ๊ณผ๋ฅผ ์–ป์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.6) The backlight unit adopting the LED package which can emit light in the side and the upper side has the effect of the surface light source like the conventional CCFL (cold cathode fluorescent lamp) because the LED package can emit the light in the upward and side directions. You can get it.
7) ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ๊ณผ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ์„ ์ƒ์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ํ•˜ํ”„ ์†Œ์ž‰(half sawing) ๋ฐฉ์‹์œผ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ œ์กฐํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ, ๊ณ ์†์œผ๋กœ ๋‹จํ’ˆ์˜ ๋ฆฌํ”Œ๋ ‰ํ„ฐ๊ฐ€ ์—†๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์‰ฝ๊ฒŒ ๋งŒ๋“ค์–ด ๋‚ธ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ์›ํ•˜๋Š” ์™„์ œํ’ˆ์„ ์ œ์กฐํ•˜๊ธฐ๊นŒ์ง€์˜ ์‹œ๊ฐ„์ด ๋‹จ์ถ•๋œ๋‹ค. 7) The LED package is manufactured by half sawing method that creates a split groove and a cut groove, thereby easily producing a single reflector-free LED package at high speed. In other words, the time to manufacture the desired finished product is shortened.
8) ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ๊ณผ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ์„ ์ƒ์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ํ•˜ํ”„ ์†Œ์ž‰(half sawing) ๋ฐฉ์‹์œผ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ œ์กฐํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ, ์†Œ์ž‰์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ์นผ๋‚ ์˜ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ˆ˜๋ช…์ด ๊ธธ์–ด์ง„๋‹ค.8) By manufacturing the LED package in a half sawing method to generate a split groove and a cut groove, the service life of the blade for sawing is lengthened.
9) ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ €๋ฉด์ด ์„œ๋กœ ๋Œ€ํ–ฅ๋˜๊ฒŒ ์„ค์น˜ํ•˜๋ฉด ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ์ง€๋‹Œ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์–ป์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Š” ์š”์ฆ˜ ์‚ฐ์—…๊ณ„์—์„œ ์š”๊ตฌํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์˜ ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๊ฐ–๋Š” ๊ด‘์›์„ ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ๊ตฌํ˜„์‹œ์ผœ ์ฃผ๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.9) When the two LED packages capable of emitting light to the side and the top are installed with their bottoms facing each other, a direction angle having a batwing characteristic can be obtained. This is enough to realize a light source having a wide direct angle of the batwing characteristics required by the industry these days.
10) ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์˜ ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์–ป์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ๊ตฌ์กฐ๋ฅผ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์— ์ด์šฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์— ์Œ์˜(์•”๋ถ€)์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ฒŒ ๋˜์–ด ํ™”์งˆ ๋ฐ ์ œํ’ˆ์˜ ์‹ ๋ขฐ์„ฑ์„ ํ–ฅ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์„ ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์œผ๋กœ ์ธํ•ด ๋ณด๋‹ค ๋ฉด๊ด‘์›์— ๊ฐ€๊นŒ์šด ํšจ๊ณผ๋ฅผ ์–ป๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. 10) By using the layout structure for the backlight unit to obtain a wide angle of view of the batting characteristics, the shadow of the base board is not generated, which not only improves image quality and product reliability, but also batting characteristics. As a result, the effect is closer to the surface light source.
๋„ 1 ๋ฐ ๋„ 2๋Š” ์ผ๋ฐ˜์ ์ธ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.1 and 2 are views for explaining the configuration of a general backlight unit.
๋„ 3 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 5๋Š” ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.3 to 5 are views for explaining the configuration of the LED package according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
๋„ 6์€ ๋„ 5์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์ƒํƒœ๋„์ด๋‹ค.6 is a state diagram of FIG.
๋„ 7์€ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.7 is a view for explaining a light emitting direction of the LED package according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
๋„ 8์€ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.8 is a view for explaining the orientation angle of the LED package according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
๋„ 9๋Š” ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•œ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ธ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.9 is a view showing a backlight unit using an LED package according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
๋„ 10์€ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ๋ถ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค.10 is an exploded perspective view of the LED package according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
๋„ 11์€ ๋„ 10์—์„œ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ์ œ์™ธํ•œ ๋‚˜๋จธ์ง€ ๋ถ€๋ถ„์„ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์‹œํ‚จ ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค.FIG. 11 is a perspective view illustrating the remaining parts of the block except for the phosphor block in FIG. 10.
๋„ 12๋Š” ๋„ 10์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค.12 is a perspective view of the combination of FIG.
๋„ 13์€ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.13 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing an LED package according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
๋„ 14๋Š” ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‘์šฉ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์˜ˆ์ธ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ ๋ฐ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์ด ์„ค์น˜๋œ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋ฅผ ๋ณด์—ฌ์ฃผ๋Š” ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.14 is a view showing a light emitting module and a backlight unit in which the light emitting module is installed, which is an example of an application device of the present invention.
๋„ 15 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 17์€ ๋„ 14์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์˜ ์–ด๋Š ํ•œ ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.15 to 17 are views for explaining the configuration of any one optical module of the light output module of FIG.
๋„ 18์€ ๋„ 17์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์ƒํƒœ๋„์ด๋‹ค.18 is a state diagram of FIG.
๋„ 19๋Š” ๋„ 14์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ๊ทน์ขŒํ‘œ ํ˜•ํƒœ์˜ ๋ฐฐ๊ด‘๊ณก์„ ๋„์ด๋‹ค.19 is a light distribution curve diagram of polar coordinates of the light output module of FIG. 14.
๋„ 20์€ ๋„ 14์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์ง๊ต ์ขŒํ‘œ ํ˜•ํƒœ์˜ ๋ฐฐ๊ด‘๊ณก์„ ๋„์ด๋‹ค.20 is a light distribution curve diagram in Cartesian coordinate form for the light output module of FIG.
๋„ 21์€ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‘์šฉ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์˜ˆ์ธ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์™€ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์˜ ์ฐจ์ด์ ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค.21 is a view for explaining the difference between the backlight unit which is an example of the application of the present invention and the conventional backlight unit.
์ดํ•˜, ์ฒจ๋ถ€๋œ ๋„๋ฉด์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€ ๊ทธ์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ• ๋ฐ ๊ทธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•œ ์žฅ์น˜์— ๋Œ€ํ•˜์—ฌ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๋ฉด ๋‹ค์Œ๊ณผ ๊ฐ™๋‹ค. ์ดํ•˜์—์„œ๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค๋ฅผ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€, ํ”Œ๋ผ์Šคํ‹ฑ ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€, ๋ฆฌ๋“œ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„ ํƒ€์ž… ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€, ํ”Œ๋ผ์Šคํ‹ฑ + ๋ฆฌ๋“œ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„ ํƒ€์ž… ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€ ๋“ฑ ๋ชจ๋“  SMD ํƒ€์ž… ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์ธ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ๊ฐ€์ •ํ•˜๊ณ  ์„ค๋ช…ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ๋ช…์„ธ์„œ์—์„œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์— ์ฑ„์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์› ๋ฐ ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๊ด‘์›์ธ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ์„ค์ •ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜๋ผ ํ•จ์€ ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜ ์ด์™ธ๋กœ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ๊ด‘์›์œผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ๋…์„œ๋“ฑ, ๊ฐ€๋กœ๋“ฑ, ๊ฐ์ข…์˜ ์‹ค๋‚ด๋“ฑ, ๋ฐ ๊ธฐํƒ€๋“ฑ๋“ฑ์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ๋ณด๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋”ฐ๋ผ์„œ, ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ๋ช…์„ธ์„œ์—์„œ ์‘์šฉ์žฅ์น˜๋ผ ํ•จ์€ ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ, ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜, ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ ๋“ฑ์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฐœ๋…์œผ๋กœ ์ดํ•ดํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์€ ์ดํ•˜์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๋Š” 2๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๊ฐ€ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์„ธํŠธ๋กœ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง„ ๊ฒƒ์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•œ๋‹ค.Hereinafter, an LED package, a manufacturing method thereof, and an apparatus using the LED package according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the LED package is any SMD type package such as a ceramic package, a plastic package, a lead frame type package, and a plastic + lead frame type package. In the specification of the present invention, the LED package is set to be a light source employed in the backlight unit of the flat panel display device and a light source of the lighting device. The lighting device means a reading light, a street lamp, various indoor lights, and other lights that can use an LED package as a light source in addition to a flat panel display device. Therefore, in the specification of the present invention, the application device may be understood as a concept including a backlight unit, a lighting device, a light emitting module, and the like of a flat panel display device. The light emitting module means that two LED packages described in the following embodiments are formed in one set.
(์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ)(First embodiment)
๋„ 3 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 5๋Š” ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค. ๋„ 6์€ ๋„ 5์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์ƒํƒœ๋„์ด๋‹ค.3 to 5 are views for explaining the configuration of the LED package according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a state diagram of FIG.
๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ(20), ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30), ๋ฐ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•œ๋‹ค.The LED package of the embodiment of the present invention includes the substrate 20, the phosphor block 30, and the LED chip 40.
๊ธฐํŒ(20)์€ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)(๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž)์„ ๊ณ ๋ฐ€๋„๋กœ ์‹ค์žฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฉด ์–ด๋Š ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‚˜ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์žฌ์งˆ๋กœ๋Š” ์•Œ๋ฃจ๋ฏธ๋‚˜(alumina), ์ˆ˜์ •(quartz), ์นผ์Š˜์ง€๋ฅด์ฝ”๋„ค์ดํŠธ(calcium zirconate), ๊ฐ๋žŒ์„(forsterite), SiC, ํ‘์—ฐ, ์šฉ์œต์‹ค๋ฆฌ์นด(fusedsilica), ๋ฎฌ๋ผ์ดํŠธ(mullite), ๊ทผ์ฒญ์„(cordierite), ์ง€๋ฅด์ฝ”๋‹ˆ์•„(zirconia), ๋ฒ ๋ฆด๋ฆฌ์•„(beryllia), ๋ฐ ์งˆํ™”์•Œ๋ฃจ๋ฏธ๋Š„(aluminum nitride), LTCC(low temperature co-fired ceramic), ํ”Œ๋ผ์Šคํ‹ฑ, ๊ธˆ์†, ๋ฐ”๋ฆฌ์Šคํ„ฐ ๋“ฑ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•˜๊ฒŒ๋Š”, ZnO๊ณ„์—ด์˜ ๋ฐ”๋ฆฌ์Šคํ„ฐ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ œ์กฐํ•จ์ด ๊ฐ€์žฅ ์ข‹๋‹ค. ์™œ๋ƒํ•˜๋ฉด ZnO๊ณ„์—ด์˜ ๋ฐ”๋ฆฌ์Šคํ„ฐ๊ฐ€ ์—ด์ „๋„์œจ์ด ๋†’๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์ด๋‹ค. ZnO๋ฅผ ์ฃผ์„ฑ๋ถ„์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐ”๋ฆฌ์Šคํ„ฐ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๋กœ ์ œ์กฐํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๋ฐ”๋ฆฌ์Šคํ„ฐ๋กœ์„œ์˜ ๊ธฐ๋Šฅ์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ๋ฐ”๋ฆฌ์Šคํ„ฐ ์ž์ฒด์˜ ๋†’์€ ์—ด์ „๋„์„ฑ์œผ๋กœ ์ธํ•ด ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์˜จ๋„๋ฅผ ์‹ ์†ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋‚ฎ์ถœ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์žฌ์งˆ์„ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน์œผ๋กœ ๊ฐ€์ •ํ•˜์˜€๋‹ค. ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน์€ ๊ทธ ์œ„์— ๊ธˆ์† ๋„์ฒด ๋ฐฐ์„  ํŒจํ„ด์„ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜์—ฌ ์†Œ์„ฑ๊ณต์ •์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ ์ธตํ˜• ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(multi-layer ceramic package; MLP)๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. The board | substrate 20 can be any if it can mount the LED chip 40 (light emitting element) at high density. For example, the material of the substrate 20 may include alumina, quartz, calcium zirconate, forsterite, SiC, graphite, fusedsilica, and mullite. Cordierite, zirconia, beryllia, and aluminum nitride, low temperature co-fired ceramic (LTCC), plastics, metals, varistors, and the like. Preferably, it is best to manufacture using a ZnO series varistor material. This is because varistors of ZnO series have high thermal conductivity. The production of ZnO-based varistor material not only functions as a varistor, but also allows the LED package to be rapidly cooled due to the high thermal conductivity of the varistor itself. In the first embodiment of the present invention, the material of the substrate 20 is assumed to be ceramic. The ceramic can be used as a multi-layer ceramic package (MLP) through the firing process by forming a metal conductor wiring pattern thereon.
๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(22, 24)์ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์€ ์ƒํ˜ธ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(22)๊ณผ ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(24)์œผ๋กœ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง„๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(22, 24)์€ ์˜จ(Ag)์œผ๋กœ ๋„๊ธˆํ•œ ๋ฆฌ๋“œ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์€ ํ˜•ํƒœ๋ฅผ ์ทจํ•œ๋‹ค. ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(24)์€ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์ƒ์—์„œ ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(22)๊ณผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์ธ ์ ˆ์—ฐ์„ ์œ„ํ•ด ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜๊ฒŒ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. Pattern electrodes 22 and 24 are formed on the upper surface of the substrate 20. The pattern electrode consists of a cathode electrode 22 and an anode electrode 24 spaced apart from each other. For example, the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 take the form of a lead frame plated with on (Ag). The anode electrode 24 is formed on the substrate 20 so as to be spaced apart from the cathode electrode 22 for electrical insulation.
๋„๋ฉด์—์„œ๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ํ‰๋ฉด ํ˜•์ƒ์„ ์ง์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜์˜€์œผ๋‚˜, ์ •์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜•์ด์–ด๋„ ๋ฌด๋ฐฉํ•˜๋‹ค. ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ํ‰๋ฉด ํ˜•์ƒ์ด ์ •์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜•์ด๋ผ๋ฉด ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์˜ ํ‰๋ฉด ํ˜•์ƒ๋„ ์ •์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜•์ผ ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‹ค. ์‹คํ—˜์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ํ™•์ธํ•ด ๋ณธ ๊ฒฐ๊ณผ, ํ‰๋ฉด ํ˜•์ƒ์„ ์ •์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜์˜€์„ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ๊ฐ€ ์ง์‚ฌ๊ฐํ˜•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜์˜€์„ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์— ๋น„ํ•ด ๋Œ€์ฒด์ ์œผ๋กœ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์ด ํผ์„ ์•Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์—ˆ๋‹ค. ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ํ‰๋ฉด ์‚ฌ์ด์ฆˆ(๊ฐ€๋กœ * ์„ธ๋กœ)์™€ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์˜ ํ‰๋ฉด ์‚ฌ์ด์ฆˆ(๊ฐ€๋กœ * ์„ธ๋กœ)๋Š” ๋™์ผํ•œ ๊ฒƒ์ด ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•˜๋‹ค. ์ด๋Š” ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์น˜์‹œํ‚ฌ ๋•Œ ๋ณด๋‹ค ์‰ฝ๊ฒŒ ๋ฐฐ์น˜์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋„๋ก ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•จ์ด๋‹ค. ์—ฌ๊ธฐ์„œ, ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ํ‰๋ฉด ์‚ฌ์ด์ฆˆ์™€ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์˜ ํ‰๋ฉด ์‚ฌ์ด์ฆˆ๋ฅผ ๋™์ผํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ•œ๋‹ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€ ์ˆ˜์น˜์ ์œผ๋กœ ์™„์ „ํžˆ ๋™์ผํ•œ ๊ฒƒ ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ์•ฝ๊ฐ„์˜ ์˜ค์ฐจ๊ฐ€ ์žˆ๋Š” ๊ฒƒ๊นŒ์ง€ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ์ดํ•ดํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. Although the planar shape of the board | substrate 20 was made rectangular in the figure, it may be square. If the planar shape of the substrate 20 is square, the planar shape of the phosphor block 30 will also be square. As a result of the experiment, it was found that the direction of the orientation is generally larger than the case of the rectangular shape of the plane shape. It is preferable that the plane size (width * length) of the substrate 20 and the plane size (width * length) of the phosphor block 30 are the same. This is to make it easier to place the LED package of the present invention when the edge is disposed. Here, to make the plane size of the substrate 20 and the plane size of the phosphor block 30 identical may be understood to include not only numerically the same but also some errors.
ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(22, 24)์˜ ํ…Œ๋‘๋ฆฌ์ค‘์—์„œ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•œ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ๋ถ€์œ„๋ฅผ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”์‹œ์ผฐ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Š” ์ถ”ํ›„์— ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ณผ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ณต์ •(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์˜ค๋ธ ํ์–ด๋ง ๋“ฑ)์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•จ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ(20)๊ณผ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด์„œ์ด๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(22, 24)์˜ ํ…Œ๋‘๋ฆฌ์ค‘์—์„œ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ์ธ์ ‘ํ•œ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ๋ถ€์œ„๊ฐ€ ๋งŽ์„์ˆ˜๋ก ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ณผ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ณต์ •์— ์˜ํ•ด ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•  ์†Œ์ง€๊ฐ€ ๋งŽ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋ž˜์„œ, ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(22)๊ณผ ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(24)์˜ ํ…Œ๋‘๋ฆฌ ๋ถ€๋ถ„์„ ์†Œ์ •์น˜ ์ œ๊ฑฐํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. A portion of the edges of the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 exposed to the adjacent side surface on the upper surface of the substrate 20 was minimized. This is to minimize the interface separation between the substrate block 20 and the phosphor block 30 that may be generated by performing a process (eg, oven curing) for bonding the phosphor block 30 to the substrate 20 later. For that. That is, the more portions of the edges of the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 that are exposed from the upper surface of the substrate 20 to the adjacent side surfaces, the more likely that the interface separation occurs by the process for bonding the phosphor block 30 and the substrate 20. many. Thus, the interface separation can be minimized by removing the edge portions of each of the cathode electrode 22 and the anode electrode 24.
๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(26, 28)๊ฐ€ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(26, 28)๋Š” ๋„์ „์„ฑ์„ ๊ฐ–๋Š” ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(26)์™€ ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(28)๋Š” ๊ฐ๊ฐ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(26)๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์„ ๊ด€ํ†ตํ•˜๋Š” ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(25)(through hole)์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(22)๊ณผ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(28)๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์„ ๊ด€ํ†ตํ•˜๋Š” ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(25)์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(24)๊ณผ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค. ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(25)์€ ํŽ€์นญ ์ž‘์—…์— ์˜ํ•ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. Conductive pads 26 and 28 are formed on the bottom surface of the substrate 20. The conductive pads 26 and 28 are made of a conductive material. The conductive pads 26 and 28 are spaced apart from each other. The conductive pad 26 is connected to the cathode electrode 22 through a through hole 25 penetrating through the substrate 20. The conductive pad 28 is connected to the anode electrode 24 through the through hole 25 penetrating the substrate 20. The through hole 25 is formed by a punching operation.
์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๊ฐ€ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ธก๋ถ€์—์„œ ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(26, 28)์™€ ๊ฐ๊ฐ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค. ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๋Š” Ag, AgPd, Au ๋“ฑ์ด ์ฝ”ํŒ…๋œ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ํ•œ๋‹ค. AgPd์˜ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ Pd์˜ ๋น„์œจ์€ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ์™€์˜ ๋ฌผ์„ฑ์„ ๊ณ ๋ คํ•˜์—ฌ ์„ ํƒ๋œ๋‹ค. Ag, AgPd, Au๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜๋Š” ์ด์œ ๋Š” ์†”๋”์™€์˜ ๋ฐ˜์‘์ด ์šฐ์ˆ˜ํ•˜๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์ด๋‹ค. ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ์กฐ๊ฑด ๋“ฑ์„ ๊ณ ๋ คํ•˜์—ฌ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)์˜ ์ฝ”ํŒ…์žฌ์งˆ์„ ๊ฒฐ์ •ํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. Ag, AgPd, Au ๋“ฑ์„ ์ฝ”ํŒ…ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์œผ๋กœ๋Š” Ag, AgPd, Au ๋“ฑ์˜ ๋„์ „์„ฑ ์žฌ์งˆ์„ ๋ฏธ์„ธ ๋ถ„๋ง๋กœ ๋งŒ๋“ค์–ด ์œ ๊ธฐ ๋ฐ”์ธ๋”์™€ ํ˜ผํ•ฉํ•˜์—ฌ ํŽ˜์ด์ŠคํŠธํ™”ํ•œ ํ›„์— ์Šคํฌ๋ฆฐ์„ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ผ์ธก๋ถ€ ํ•˜๋ถ€์˜ ํ™ˆ(์ฆ‰, ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๊ฐ€ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋  ๋ถ€์œ„)์˜ ๋ฒฝ๋ฉด์— ์ฝ”ํŒ…ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฌผ๋ก , ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅํ›„ ๋ฆฌํ”Œ๋กœ์šฐ ๊ณต์ •์—์„œ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๋ฐ•๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๋ฐฉ์ง€ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ์ธ์‡„ ๋˜๋Š” ๋„๊ธˆ๊ณต์ •์„ ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋กœ ํ–‰ํ•˜์—ฌ๋„ ๋œ๋‹ค. Solder pads 23 are connected to the conductive pads 26 and 28 at the sides of the substrate 20, respectively. The solder pads 23 are coated with Ag, AgPd, Au, or the like. In the case of AgPd, the ratio of Pd is selected in consideration of physical properties with the material of the substrate 20. The reason for using Ag, AgPd, Au is because it reacts well with solder. What is necessary is just to determine the coating material of the solder pad 23 in consideration of each condition. As a method of coating Ag, AgPd, Au, etc., a conductive powder such as Ag, AgPd, Au, etc. is made into a fine powder, mixed with an organic binder, and pasted to form a paste. That is, the method of coating on the wall surface of the solder pad 23 to be formed) may be used. Of course, a printing or plating process may be further performed to prevent peeling that may occur in the reflow process after surface mounting of the LED package.
์ƒ๊ธฐ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•œ ์ฝ”ํŒ… ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ• ์ด์™ธ๋กœ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์ด ์žˆ๋‹ค๋ฉด ์ฑ„์šฉ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ์–‡๊ฒŒ ์ฝ”ํŒ…ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฉ์‹ ๋Œ€์‹ ์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)์˜ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๋ฅผ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ํ™ˆ์— ์™„์ „ํžˆ ์ฑ„์šฐ๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ํ™ˆ์˜ ํฌ๊ธฐ์™€ ๋™์ผํ•œ ๊ธˆ์†์˜ ๋ฐ•ํŽธ์„ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ํ™ˆ์— ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๋ฐฉ์‹์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ๋„ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋Ÿฌ๋‚˜, ๊ทธ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—๋Š” ๋‹จํ’ˆ์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ์ ˆ๋‹จ(sawing)์‹œ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๊ฐ€ ๋–จ์–ด์ ธ ๋‚˜๊ฐˆ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅ์„ฑ์ด ๋†’๋‹ค. ๊ทธ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, ์–‡๊ฒŒ ์ฝ”ํŒ…ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฉ์‹์„ ์ฑ„์šฉํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•˜๋‹ค. If there is a method that can form the solder pads 23 in addition to the coating method described above, it is possible to employ. Instead of the thin coating method, the material of the solder pad 23 may be completely filled in each groove or a piece of metal of the same size as the groove may be bonded to each groove. However, in that case, there is a high possibility that the solder pads 23 fall off during sawing for a single piece. Therefore, it is preferable to employ a thin coating method.
๋ฌผ๋ก , ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ผ์ธก๋ถ€ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ํ™ˆ์„ ๋งŒ๋“ค์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ  ๊ทธ ์œ„์น˜์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)์˜ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๋ฅผ ์ฝ”ํŒ…ํ•  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—๋Š” ์™„์„ฑ๋œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ๋ˆ•ํ˜€์„œ ์‹ค์žฅ(์ฆ‰, ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๊ฐ€ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๋ถ€์œ„๊ฐ€ ํ•˜๋ถ€์˜ PCB๊ธฐํŒ(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด๊ณผ ๋ฐ€์ฐฉ)ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)์˜ ๋‘๊ป˜๋กœ ์ธํ•ด ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๊ฐ€ ์•ฝ๊ฐ„ ๊ธฐ์šธ์–ด์ง„ ํ˜•ํƒœ๊ฐ€ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๊ธฐ์šธ์–ด์ง„ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์— ์˜ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ์›ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐฐํ–ฅ๊ณก์„ ์„ ์–ป๊ธฐ๊ฐ€ ์–ด๋ ต๋‹ค. ๋”ฐ๋ผ์„œ, ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ผ์ธก๋ถ€ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ํ™ˆ์„ ๋งŒ๋“ค์–ด ๊ทธ ํ™ˆ์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด ๋ณด๋‹ค ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•˜๋‹ค. Of course, it is also possible to coat the material of the solder pad 23 at the position without making a groove in the lower portion of one side of the substrate 20. In this case, when the completed LED package is laid down (that is, the area where the solder pad 23 is formed closely adheres to the surface of the lower PCB substrate (not shown)), the LED package may be slightly damaged due to the thickness of the solder pad 23. It is inclined form. The tilted LED package makes it difficult to obtain the desired alignment curve. Therefore, it is more preferable to form a groove in the lower portion of one side of the substrate 20 to form the solder pad 23 in the groove.
์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์งํ•˜ํ˜•(top view๋ฐฉ์‹)์œผ๋กœ ์‹ค์žฅ(์ฆ‰, ๋„ 6๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์€ ์ƒํƒœ๋กœ ์‹ค์žฅ)์‹œํ‚ค๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์˜ ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(26, 28)๊ฐ€ ํ•˜๋ถ€์˜ PCB๊ธฐํŒ(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์— ์†”๋”๋ง๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฌผ๋ก , ์ด๋•Œ, ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(26, 28)์˜ ๋‚ฉ๋•œ์ด ์–ด๋ ค์šธ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๋ฅผ ํ•จ๊ป˜ ๋‚ฉ๋•œํ•˜์—ฌ๋„ ๋œ๋‹ค. ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๋Š” ๋‚ฉ๋•œ์˜ ์šฉ์ด์„ฑ์„ ์ œ๊ณตํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ ์‹ค์žฅ(์ฆ‰, ๋„ 6์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ 90๋„ ๋ˆ•ํ˜€์„œ ์‹ค์žฅ)์‹œํ‚ค๋”๋ผ๋„ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ธก๋ถ€์˜ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๋ฅผ ํ•˜๋ถ€์˜ PCB๊ธฐํŒ(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์— ์†”๋”๋ง์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋ฐ ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅ์ด ๋ชจ๋‘ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค.When the LED package of the first embodiment is mounted in a top view (ie, mounted in a state as shown in FIG. 6), the conductive pads 26 and 28 on the bottom of the substrate 20 are disposed on the lower PCB substrate (not shown). Soldered). Of course, in this case, when soldering of the conductive pads 26 and 28 is difficult, the solder pads 23 may be soldered together. The solder pads 23 provide for ease of soldering. The solder pad 23 on the side of the substrate 20 is soldered to the lower PCB substrate (not shown) even when the LED package of the first embodiment is mounted in an edge type (that is, the LED package of FIG. 6 is laid down 90 degrees). You can. That is, the LED package of the first embodiment can be surface mounted in both a direct type and an edge type.
ํ•œํŽธ, ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(26, 28)๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ค์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ ์„œ๋„ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋ฐ ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๋„ 3์—์„œ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ฌ ํ™ˆ์„ ๋ณด๋‹ค ๊นŠ๊ฒŒ ํŒŒ์„œ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(22, 24)๊ณผ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๊ฐ€ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(25)์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ง์ ‘ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋˜๊ฒŒ ํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ํ•˜๋ฉด ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)์— ์˜ํ•œ ์งํ•˜ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅ๋„ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๊ณ  ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅ๋„ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค.On the other hand, the LED package of the first embodiment can be surface mounted in a direct type and an edge type without forming the conductive pads 26 and 28. For example, in FIG. 3, the grooves for forming the solder pads 23 may be dug deeper to directly connect the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 and the solder pads 23 through the through holes 25. In this way, the surface mounting in the direct type by the solder pad 23 is possible, and the surface mounting in the edge type is also possible.
์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์ด ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(22))์ƒ์— ํƒ‘์žฌ๋œ๋‹ค. ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์€ ์™€์ด์–ด(42)๋ฅผ ํ†ตํ•ด ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(24)์— ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋„๋ฉด์—๋Š” ๋„์‹œํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜์ง€๋งŒ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)๊ณผ ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(22) ์‚ฌ์ด๋Š” ์ ˆ์—ฐ๋ฌผ์งˆ์— ์˜ํ•ด ์ ˆ์—ฐ๋˜์–ด ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํ•„์š”์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ์„œ๋Š” ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน์„ ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๊ณ  ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน์„ ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน์œผ๋กœ ๊ต์ฒดํ•  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋Š”๋ฐ, ์ด ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—๋Š” ๊ตฌ๋™์ „์› ์ธ๊ฐ€๋ฐฉ์‹์„ ๋ฐ˜๋Œ€๋กœ ํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค.The LED chip 40 is mounted on the pattern electrode (for example, the cathode electrode 22). The LED chip 40 is electrically connected to the anode electrode 24 through the wire 42. Although not shown in the drawings, the LED chip 40 and the cathode electrode 22 are insulated by an insulating material. If necessary, the anode electrode may be used as the cathode electrode and the cathode electrode may be replaced with the anode electrode. In this case, the driving power application method may be reversed.
์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์ด ํƒ‘์žฌ๋œ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์ด ์ ์ธต๋œ๋‹ค. ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์€ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์ด ๋ฐฑ์ƒ‰์˜ ๊ด‘์„ ์ถœ๊ด‘ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค๋ฉด ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ  ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜(๋˜๋Š” ์—ํญ์‹œ)์œผ๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ค๊ฑฐ๋‚˜ ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜(๋˜๋Š” ์—ํญ์‹œ) ๋ฐ ๋””ํ“จ์ €๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์€ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ์—๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก ๋Œ€์‹ ์— ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜ ๋ธ”๋ก์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ์นญํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์€ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์ด ์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€ ์ฒญ์ƒ‰์˜ ๊ด‘์„ ์ถœ๊ด‘ํ•œ๋‹ค๋ฉด ์˜๋กœ์šฐ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด์™€ ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜(๋˜๋Š” ์—ํญ์‹œ)์ด ํ˜ผํ•ฉ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ํ•œ๋‹ค. ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด์˜ ์ข…๋ฅ˜ ๋ฐ ๋ฐฐํ•ฉ ์ •๋„ ๋“ฑ์ด ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ์กฐ์ ˆ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€ ๋‹น์—ฐํ•˜๋‹ค.The phosphor block 30 is stacked on the upper surface of the substrate 20 on which the LED chip 40 is mounted. The phosphor block 30 may be composed of silicon (or epoxy) without using phosphor or silicon (or epoxy) and diffuser if the LED chip 40 can emit white light. When no phosphor is used, the silicon block may be referred to instead of the phosphor block. The phosphor block 30 is a mixture of yellow phosphor and silicon (or epoxy) if the LED chip 40 emits blue light, for example. It is natural that the type and compounding degree of the phosphor can be sufficiently controlled.
์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌํŒ์„ ๊ตฌ๋น„ํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค. ๊ทธ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, ๋„ 7์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ขŒ์šฐ ์ธก๋ฉด(a๋ฐฉํ–ฅ; ์ธก๋ฐฉ)์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฉด(b๋ฐฉํ–ฅ; ์ƒ๋ฐฉ)์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ๋„ 7์˜ a๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์€ ๋งˆ์น˜ ์ขŒ์šฐ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๋งŒ์„ ์˜๋ฏธํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ฒ˜๋Ÿผ ๋„์‹œ๋˜์–ด ์žˆ์œผ๋‚˜, ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์˜ ๋‹จ๋ณ€์ธก์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๋„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ๋ด„์ด ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•˜๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ๋„ 7์—์„œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(50)์˜ ์žฅ์ถ•์„ X์ถ•์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•˜๊ณ  ๋‹จ์ถ•์„ Y์ถ•์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ์„ค์ •ํ•˜๊ณ , X์ถ•๊ณผ Y์ถ•์˜ ๊ด‘๋„๋ฅผ ๋น„๊ตํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ณด๋ฉด ํ•˜๊ธฐ์˜ ํ‘œ 1๊ณผ ๊ฐ™๋‹ค.The LED package of the first embodiment described above does not have a separate reflector. As a result, light emission to the left and right side surfaces (a direction; side) and light emission to the upper surface (b direction; upward) are possible as shown in FIG. 7. Although the a direction of FIG. 7 is illustrated as meaning only light output toward the left and right sides, it is preferable to include light output toward the short side of the phosphor block 30. In FIG. 7, the long axis of the LED package 50 is referred to as the X axis, and the short axis is set to the Y axis, and the luminance of the X axis and the Y axis is compared with Table 1 below.
ํ‘œ 1
IF [mA] IV[cd]
Y์ถ•(์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘) 20 0.256
X์ถ•(์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘) 20 0.578
Table 1
I F [mA] IV [cd]
Y axis (side emission) 20 0.256
X axis (upper emission) 20 0.578
์ฆ‰, ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘(b๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘)์— ์˜ํ•œ ๊ด‘๋„("0.578")๋ฅผ 100% ๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•œ๋‹ค๋ฉด ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘(a๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘)์— ์˜ํ•œ ๊ด‘๋„("0.256")๋Š” ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์— ์˜ํ•œ ๊ด‘๋„์˜ 44% ์ •๋„์ด๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์‹œ ๋งํ•ด์„œ, ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋Œ€๋น„ ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์˜ ๊ด‘๋„๊ฐ€ ๋Œ€๋žต 50% ์ •๋„์ด๋‹ค.That is, if the luminous intensity ("0.578") by the upper emission (emission in the b direction) is 100%, the luminous intensity ("0.256") by the side emission (the emission in the a direction) is 44% of the luminous intensity by the upper emission. It is enough. In other words, the luminous intensity of the side light emission relative to the top light emission is about 50%.
ํ•œํŽธ, X์ถ•์„ ๊ธฐ์ค€์œผ๋กœ ํ•œ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ ๋ฐ Y์ถ•์„ ๊ธฐ์ค€์œผ๋กœ ํ•œ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์‚ดํŽด๋ณด๋ฉด, ๋„ 8์˜ ๋ฐฐ๊ด‘๊ณก์„ ๊ณผ ๊ฐ™๋‹ค. X์ถ• ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์€ ๋„ 8์˜ (a)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋Œ€๋žต 160๋„ ~ 170๋„ ์ •๋„์ด๊ณ , Y์ถ• ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์€ ๋„ 8์˜ (b)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋Œ€๋žต 140๋„ ~ 145๋„ ์ •๋„์ด๋‹ค.On the other hand, looking at the orientation angle based on the X-axis and the orientation angle based on the Y-axis, as shown in the light distribution curve of FIG. The X-axis orientation angle is approximately 160 degrees to 170 degrees as in FIG. 8A, and the Y-axis orientation angle is approximately 140 to 145 degrees as in FIG. 8B.
์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์— ๋น„ํ•ด ํ›จ์”ฌ ํฐ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๊ฐ€์ง์„ ์•Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. It can be seen that the LED package of the first embodiment has a much larger orientation angle than that of the conventional LED package.
๋„ 8์˜ (a)๋ฅผ ๋ณด๋ฉด ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ๊ฐ–๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ๋„ ๋ณผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋ฌผ๋ก , ํ›„์ˆ ํ•  ๋„ 19์— ๋น„ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ๋‹ค์†Œ ๋ฏธํกํ•˜๋‹ค. Referring to FIG. 8A, the LED package of the first embodiment may also be viewed as having a batwing characteristic. Of course, this is somewhat inferior to FIG. 19 which will be described later.
์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์— ์˜ํ•˜๋ฉด, ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž์˜ ๊ด‘์„ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์‹œํ‚ค๋ฏ€๋กœ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์ด ํ›จ์”ฌ ๋„“๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌํŒ์„ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์œผ๋ฏ€๋กœ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์— ๋น„ํ•ด ๊ตฌ์กฐ๊ฐ€ ๋งค์šฐ ๊ฐ„๋‹จํ•˜๋‹ค.According to the LED package of the first embodiment described above, since the light of the light emitting device is emitted upward and laterally through the phosphor block, the directivity angle is much wider than that of the conventional LED package. In addition, since the reflective plate is not used, the structure is very simple compared to the conventional LED package.
์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ๋ถ€์œ„๋ฅผ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”์‹œ์ผœ, ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก๊ณผ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ณต์ •(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์˜ค๋ธ ํ์–ด๋ง ๋“ฑ)์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•จ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜๋Š” ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ํšจ๊ณผ๊ฐ€ ์žˆ๋‹ค.By minimizing the portion of the pattern electrode exposed to the side of the LED package, there is an effect of minimizing the interface separation generated by performing a process for bonding the phosphor block and the substrate (eg, oven curing).
์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋ฐ ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅ์ด ๋ชจ๋‘ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค.Both direct mounting and edge mounting are possible.
๋„ 9๋Š” ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๊ฐ€ ์ฑ„์šฉ๋œ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋ฅผ ๋‚˜ํƒ€๋‚ธ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค. 9 is a view illustrating a backlight unit employing an LED package according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(์ฆ‰, ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€)๋Š” ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์— ์ฑ„์šฉ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(50)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐ” ํƒ€์ž…์˜ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(10)์— ์ƒํ˜ธ ์†Œ์ • ๊ฐ„๊ฒฉ์œผ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜์–ด ํ•˜๋‚˜์”ฉ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์น˜๋œ๋‹ค.The LED package of the above-described first embodiment (that is, the LED package capable of emitting light in the side and upward) can be employed in the backlight unit. That is, the plurality of LED packages 50 are spaced apart from each other at predetermined intervals on the bar type base substrate 10 and are arranged in one line.
๋„ 9์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(10)์ƒ์— ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(50)(์ฆ‰, ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€)๋ฅผ ์„ค์น˜ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด, ์ข…๋ž˜(๋„ 2)์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์ ์€ ์ˆ˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์ด ํ•จ๊ป˜ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ ธ์„œ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(10)์˜ ์žฅ์ถ•์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์Œ์˜(์•”(ๆš—)๋ถ€๋ผ๊ณ ๋„ ํ•จ)์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Š” ์ข…๋ž˜์™€ ๋น„๊ตํ•˜์—ฌ ํ™”์งˆ์„ ํ–ฅ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ฌ ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ์‹œ๊ฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ๋„ ์ข‹๊ณ  ์ œํ’ˆ์˜ ์‹ ๋ขฐ์„ฑ์„ ํ–ฅ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ค๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. When the LED package 50 (that is, the LED package capable of emitting light to the side and upward) is installed on the base substrate 10 as shown in FIG. 9, a smaller number of LED packages can be used than in the related art (FIG. 2). do. In addition, light emission toward the side and the upper side is performed together so that shadows (also called dark portions) do not occur along the long axis of the base substrate 10. This not only improves image quality as compared to the conventional art, but also improves the visual quality and reliability of the product.
์ด์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ฑ„์šฉํ•œ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์—์„œ์˜ ์‘์šฉ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์ผ ์˜ˆ๊ฐ€ ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ฑ„์šฉํ•œ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ํ•˜๋‚˜์”ฉ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด์‹œํ‚ด์œผ๋กœ์จ, ์ข…๋ž˜์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์ ์€ ์ˆ˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜๊ณ ์„œ๋„ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์— ์Œ์˜(์•”๋ถ€)์„ ๋ฐœ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ค์ง€ ์•Š๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Š” ํ™”์งˆ ๋ฐ ์ œํ’ˆ์˜ ์‹ ๋ขฐ์„ฑ์„ ํ–ฅ์ƒ์‹œํ‚จ๋‹ค. Thus, the backlight unit employing the LED package of the first embodiment is an example of the application device in the present invention. In the backlight unit employing the LED package of the first embodiment, LED packages capable of emitting light to the side and the top are arranged one by one, thereby generating shadows (dark portions) on the base substrate even though fewer LED packages are used than in the related art. It won't let you. This improves image quality and product reliability.
๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ฑ„์šฉํ•œ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๊ฐ€ ๋ชจ๋“  ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ ๋ฉด๊ด‘์›์˜ ํšจ๊ณผ๋ฅผ ์–ป์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.In the backlight unit employing the LED package of the first embodiment, the LED package emits light in all directions, thereby obtaining the effect of the surface light source.
์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์— ์ฑ„์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ ์ด์™ธ๋กœ ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜ ๋“ฑ์—๋„ ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ๊ด‘์›์œผ๋กœ์„œ์˜ ์—ญํ• ์„ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, 120๋„ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์š”๊ตฌํ•˜๋Š” ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜ ๋“ฑ์— ๋งค์šฐ ํšจ๊ณผ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋œ๋‹ค. The LED package of the first embodiment described above can serve as a light source sufficiently for an illumination device or the like, in addition to being employed in the backlight unit of the flat panel display device. Accordingly, it is very effectively used for lighting devices requiring a wide directing angle of 120 degrees or more.
์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(22)๊ณผ ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(24)์˜ ์–‘์ธก๋ถ€์—๋Š” ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ๊ฐ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค(๋„ 3 ์ฐธ์กฐ). ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ์–‘์ธก๋ถ€๋กœ ๊ฐ๊ฐ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)๋Š” ์ œ์กฐ๊ณต์ •์ƒ ํ•ด๋‹น ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์˜†์— ์œ„์น˜ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋Š” ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€์˜ ๋„๊ธˆ ๋ผ์ธ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ์„ ์œ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‹ค. ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(22, 24)์€ ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)๋ฅผ ํ™œ์šฉํ•œ ์ „๊ธฐ๋„๊ธˆ ๊ณต์ •์— ์˜ํ•ด ๋„๊ธˆ(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€ ์€๋„๊ธˆ)์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ๋œ๋‹ค. In the first embodiment described above, protrusions 22a and 24a are formed on both sides of the cathode electrode 22 and the anode electrode 24, respectively (see FIG. 3). The protrusions 22a and 24a are exposed to both sides of the upper surface of the substrate 20, respectively. The protrusions 22a and 24a are used for connecting the plating lines with other LED packages which are positioned next to the corresponding LED packages in the manufacturing process. The pattern electrodes 22 and 24 are plated (for example, silver plated) by an electroplating process utilizing the protrusions 22a and 24a.
์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ณผ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)๊ณผ์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์‹œ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜๋Š” ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์ตœ์†Œํ™”ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ๋„๊ธˆ ๊ณต์ •์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)๋งŒ์„ ๋‚จ๊ฒจ๋‘๊ณ  ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(22, 24)์ด ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋„๋ก ํ•˜์˜€๋‹ค.In the first embodiment, in order to minimize the interfacial separation generated when the phosphor block 30 and the substrate 20 are combined, the pattern electrode is disposed on the side of the substrate 20 except for the protrusions 22a and 24a for the plating process. (22, 24) was not exposed.
๊ทธ๋Ÿฌ๋‚˜, ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)๊ฐ€ ์—ฌ์ „ํžˆ ๋‚จ์•„ ์žˆ๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์— ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์˜ ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜๊ณผ ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)๊ฐ„์˜ ์ด์ข…์ ‘ํ•ฉ์ด ์ œ๋Œ€๋กœ ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ๊ฐ€ ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•œ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ๋ชฐ๋“œํ›„์— ๊ธฐํŒ(20)๊ณผ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ(๋ณด๋‹ค ์ž์„ธํ•˜๊ฒŒ๋Š”, ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)์™€ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ํ•ด๋‹น ๋ถ€์œ„์—์„œ์˜ ๋“ค๋œธ์œผ๋กœ ์ธํ•ด ์Šต๊ธฐ ๋“ฑ์ด ์นจํˆฌํ•˜์—ฌ ํ•ด๋‹น ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ๋™์ž‘ ์‹ ๋ขฐ์„ฑ์— ์•…์˜ํ–ฅ์„ ๋ผ์น˜๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.However, there is a case where the heterojunction between the silicon of the phosphor block 30 and the protrusions 22a and 24a is not properly performed because the protrusions 22a and 24a still remain. In that case, after the mold, the interface separation between the substrate 20 and the phosphor block 30 (more specifically, the interface separation between the protrusions 22a and 24a and the phosphor block 30) occurs. When the interfacial separation occurs, moisture is penetrated by the floating in the corresponding area, which adversely affects the operation reliability of the LED package.
ํ•œํŽธ, ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์ œ์กฐํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด์„œ๋Š”, ์šฐ์„  ์›ํŒ์˜ ๊ธฐํŒ์— ๋ฆฌ๋“œ ํ”„๋ ˆ์ž„ํŒ(์ฆ‰, ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์œผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋  ์ „๊ทน ํ˜•์ƒ์ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๊ณ  ์€๋„๊ธˆ์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ๋œ ํŒ)์„ ์–นํžŒ ํ›„์— ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ์„ ํƒ‘์žฌํ•œ๋‹ค. ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ์„ ์™€์ด์–ด ๋ณธ๋”ฉํ•˜๊ณ  ๋‚˜์„œ ์›ํŒ์˜ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋กํŒ์„ ๋ชฐ๋”ฉ๋ฐฉ์‹ ๋“ฑ์œผ๋กœ ์–นํžŒ๋‹ค. ์ดํ›„, ์†Œ์ž‰(sawing) ๊ธฐ๊ณ„๋กœ ์†Œ์ž‰ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋‹จํ’ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ์™„์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ค๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ์ œ์กฐ๊ณต์ •์€ ๋™์ข…์—…๊ณ„์— ์ข…์‚ฌํ•˜๋Š” ์ž๋ผ๋ฉด ์•ž์„œ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•œ ๊ตฌ์กฐ๋ฅผ ๊ทผ๊ฑฐ๋กœ ์ฃผ์ง€์˜ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ์„ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ์œ ์ถ”ํ•ด ๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ์ œ์กฐ๊ณต์ •์€ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ณผ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์„ ๋™์‹œ์— ์ ˆ๋‹จํ•˜๋Š” ํ’€ ์†Œ์ž‰(full sawing) ๋ฐฉ์‹์„ ์ทจํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋  ๊ฒƒ์ด๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ํ’€ ์†Œ์ž‰ ๋ฐฉ์‹์€ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ณผ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์„ ๋™์‹œ์— ์ ˆ๋‹จํ•ด์•ผ ํ•˜๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์— ์ž‘์—…์‹œ๊ฐ„์ด ๋งŽ์ด ์†Œ์š”๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฌผ๋ก , ์†Œ์ž‰ ์†๋„๋ฅผ ๋†’์ด๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ์ž‘์—…์‹œ๊ฐ„์„ ์ค„์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ฒ ์ง€๋งŒ, ์ด๋ ‡๊ฒŒ ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ์ ˆ๋‹จ๋ฉด์ด ๊ณ ๋ฅด์ง€ ๋ชปํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋  ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ์ ˆ๋‹จ๋ฉด์— ๋ฒ„(burr)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•  ๊ฐ€๋Šฅ์„ฑ์ด ๋†’๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน์€ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด์— ๋น„ํ•ด ๋‹จ๋‹จํ•˜๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์— ์†Œ์ž‰์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ์นผ๋‚ ์˜ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ˆ˜๋ช…์ด ๊ธธ์ง€ ๋ชปํ•˜๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋กœ ์ธํ•ด, ์นผ๋‚ ์˜ ์†Œ์š”๋Ÿ‰์ด ์ฆ๊ฐ€ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜์–ด ์ž‘์—… ๋น„์šฉ์ด ์ฆ๊ฐ€ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. On the other hand, in order to manufacture the LED package of the first embodiment described above, the LED chip is mounted after first placing a lead frame plate (that is, a plate formed with an electrode shape to be used as a pattern electrode and being silver plated) on a substrate of the original plate. After wire-bonding the LED chip, the phosphor block plate of the original plate is placed by molding or the like. Thereafter, the sawing machine is sawed to complete the single package LED. Such a manufacturing process can be sufficiently inferred by those skilled in the same industry using well-known techniques based on the structure described above. In addition, this manufacturing process will take a full sawing method for simultaneously cutting the phosphor block 30 and the ceramic substrate 20. This pull sawing method requires a lot of work time because the phosphor block 30 and the ceramic substrate 20 must be cut at the same time. Of course, if the sawing speed is increased, working time can be reduced, but this will not only make the cutting surface uneven but also have a high possibility of burrs on the cutting surface. In addition, since the ceramic is harder than the phosphor, the service life of the blade for sawing is not long. As a result, the requirements of the blades increase, thereby increasing the operating cost.
๋”ฐ๋ผ์„œ, ์ดํ•˜์—์„œ ์„ค๋ช…๋  ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ๊ณผ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ์™„์ „ํžˆ ์ œ๊ฑฐํ•˜๊ณ , ์™„์ œํ’ˆ ์ œ์กฐ์‹œ๊ฐ„์„ ๋‹จ์ถ•ํ•˜๊ณ  ์นผ๋‚ ์˜ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ˆ˜๋ช…์„ ์—ฐ์žฅํ•จ์„ ์ฃผ์š” ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•œ๋‹ค.Therefore, the second embodiment to be described below is characterized by completely eliminating the interface separation between the substrate and the phosphor block, shortening the finished product manufacturing time and extending the service life of the blade.
(์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ)(Second embodiment)
๋„ 10์€ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ๋ถ„ํ•ด ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค. ๋„ 11์€ ๋„ 10์—์„œ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ์ œ์™ธํ•œ ๋‚˜๋จธ์ง€ ๋ถ€๋ถ„์„ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์‹œํ‚จ ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค. ๋„ 12๋Š” ๋„ 10์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ ์‚ฌ์‹œ๋„์ด๋‹ค. ๋„ 10 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 12์—์„œ์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์ค‘์—์„œ ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์™€ ๋™์ผํ•œ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ๋™์ผํ•œ ์ฐธ์กฐ๋ถ€ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ๋ถ€์—ฌํ•˜๋ฉด์„œ ๊ทธ์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์„ธ๋ถ€ ์„ค๋ช…์€ ์ƒ๋žตํ•œ๋‹ค.10 is an exploded perspective view of the LED package according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a perspective view illustrating the remaining parts of the block except for the phosphor block in FIG. 10. 12 is a perspective view of the combination of FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same components as those of the above-described first embodiment among the components in FIGS. 10 to 12, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ๊ธฐํŒ(60), ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30), ๋ฐ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•œ๋‹ค. The LED package of the second embodiment includes the substrate 60, the phosphor block 30, and the LED chip 40.
๊ธฐํŒ(60)์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์„ค๋ช…์€ ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ๊ธฐํŒ(20)๊ณผ ๋™์ผํ•˜๋‹ค.The description of the substrate 60 is the same as that of the substrate 20 of the first embodiment described above.
์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ, ๊ธฐํŒ(60)์€ ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(61, 62, 63, 64)๊ฐ€ ์ ์ธต ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ตœํ•˜์ธต์˜ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(64)์—๋Š” ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65; through hall)์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜์–ด ์ˆ˜์ง ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์€ ํŽ€์นญ ์ž‘์—…์— ์˜ํ•ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. In the second embodiment, the substrate 60 is formed by stacking a plurality of ceramic sheets 61, 62, 63, 64. In the lowermost ceramic sheet 64, two through holes 65 are spaced apart from each other and are formed in the vertical direction. The through hole 65 is formed by a punching operation.
์ตœํ•˜์ธต์˜ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(64)์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์—๋Š” ์ •(+), ๋ถ€(-)์˜ ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68; 68a, 68b)๊ฐ€ ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜๊ฒŒ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68)๋Š” ๋„์ „์„ฑ์„ ๊ฐ–๋Š” ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค.Positive (+) and negative (-) conductive pads 68 (68a, 68b) are formed on the bottom of the lowermost ceramic sheet 64 so as to be spaced apart from each other. The conductive pad 68 is made of a conductive material.
๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68a, 68b)๋Š” ๋Œ€์‘๋˜๋Š” ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)๊ณผ ์ ‘์ด‰ํ•˜๋„๋ก ๋ฐ€์ฐฉ๋œ๋‹ค. ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(64)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(63)๊ฐ€ ์ ์ธต๋˜๊ณ , ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(63)์—๋Š” ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65; through hall)์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜์–ด ์ˆ˜์ง ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. The conductive pads 68a and 68b are in close contact with the corresponding through holes 65. The ceramic sheet 63 is stacked on the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 64, and two through holes 65 are spaced apart from each other in the ceramic sheet 63 to be formed in the vertical direction.
์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(63)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ๊ธˆ์† ์žฌ์งˆ์˜ ๋ฐ•ํŽธ์ธ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b; 67)๊ฐ€ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(66a, 66b; 66)์„ ๊ฐ€๋กœ์ง€๋ฅด๋Š” ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์„ค์น˜๋œ๋‹ค. ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(63)์˜ ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์ค‘ ์–ด๋Š ํ•˜๋‚˜๊ฐ€ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a)์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ๋‹ค. ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(63)์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•œ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์ด ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67b)์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(63, 64)์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์€ ์ƒํ•˜๋กœ ๋งˆ์ฃผ ๋ณด๋Š” ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€๋ผ๋ฆฌ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ๋‹ค. On the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 63, inner pads 67a, 67b and 67, which are thin metal foils, are provided in a direction crossing the pattern electrodes 66a, 66b and 66. One of the two through holes 65 of the ceramic sheet 63 is in contact with the inner pad 67a. The other through hole 65 of the ceramic sheet 63 is in contact with the inner pad 67b. In addition, the through holes 65 of the ceramic sheets 63 and 64 are in contact with the through holes facing up and down.
๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b)๊ฐ€ ๋ฐ€์ฐฉ๋œ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(63)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(62)๊ฐ€ ์ ์ธต๋œ๋‹ค. ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(62)์—๋Š” ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜์–ด ์ˆ˜์ง ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. The ceramic sheet 62 is laminated on the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 63 in which the inner pads 67a and 67b are in close contact. In the ceramic sheet 62, two through holes 65 are spaced apart from each other and are formed in a vertical direction.
์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(61)๊ฐ€ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(62)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ์ ์ธต๋œ๋‹ค. ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(61)์—๋Š” ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜์–ด ์ˆ˜์ง ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(61, 62)์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์€ ์ƒํ•˜๋กœ ๋งˆ์ฃผ ๋ณด๋Š” ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€๋ผ๋ฆฌ ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ๋‹ค. The ceramic sheet 61 is laminated on the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 62. In the ceramic sheet 61, two through holes 65 are spaced apart from each other and are formed in a vertical direction. In addition, the through holes 65 of the ceramic sheets 61 and 62 are in contact with the through holes facing up and down.
๋„ 10์— ๋„์‹œ๋œ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์—๋Š” ๋„์ „์„ฑ ๋ฌผ์งˆ์ด ์ถฉ์ „๋œ๋‹ค. The through hole 65 shown in FIG. 10 is filled with a conductive material.
์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(61)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(66)์ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(66)์€ ์ƒํ˜ธ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(66a)๊ณผ ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(66b)์œผ๋กœ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง„๋‹ค. ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(66a)์ด ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(61)์˜ ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์ค‘ ์–ด๋Š ํ•˜๋‚˜์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋˜๊ณ , ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(66b)์ด ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์‹œํŠธ(61)์˜ ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ํ•œ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์— ์ ‘์ด‰๋œ๋‹ค. ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(66b)์€ ์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(66a)๊ณผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์ธ ์ ˆ์—ฐ์„ ์œ„ํ•ด ์ด๊ฒฉ๋˜๊ฒŒ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. The pattern electrode 66 is formed on the upper surface of the ceramic sheet 61. The pattern electrode 66 includes a cathode electrode 66a and an anode electrode 66b spaced apart from each other. The cathode electrode 66a is in contact with one of the two through holes 65 of the ceramic sheet 61, and the anode electrode 66b is in contact with the other through hole 65 of the ceramic sheet 61. The anode electrode 66b is formed spaced apart from the cathode electrode 66a for electrical insulation.
์บ์†Œ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(66a)์€ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a) ๋ฐ ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68a)์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค. ์• ๋…ธ๋“œ ์ „๊ทน(66b)์€ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์„ ํ†ตํ•ด ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67b) ๋ฐ ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68b)์— ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b)์˜ ์–‘ ๋‹จ์ด ๊ธฐํŒ(60)์˜ ์–‘ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b)๋ฅผ ํ™œ์šฉํ•œ ์ „๊ธฐ๋„๊ธˆ ๊ณต์ •์— ์˜ํ•ด ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(66)์ด ๋„๊ธˆ(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์€๋„๊ธˆ)์ฒ˜๋ฆฌ๋œ๋‹ค. ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(66a, 66b)์€ ๋„ 12์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ , ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b)์˜ ์–‘ ๋‹จ์ด ๊ธฐํŒ(60)์˜ ์–‘ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋œ๋‹ค. ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(66a, 66b)์„ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋„๋ก ํ•œ ๊ฒƒ์€ ์ถ”ํ›„์— ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ณผ ๊ธฐํŒ(60)์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ๊ณต์ •(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์˜ค๋ธ ํ์–ด๋ง ๋“ฑ)์„ ์ˆ˜ํ–‰ํ•  ๋•Œ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ณผ ๊ธฐํŒ(60)๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๋„๋ก ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•จ์ด๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š” ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a; ๋„ 3 ์ฐธ์กฐ)๊ฐ€ ์žˆ์–ด์„œ ๊ทธ ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€์˜ ๋ถ€์œ„์—์„œ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜์—ˆ์œผ๋‚˜, ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š” ๊ทธ๋Ÿฌํ•œ ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ฑฐํ•˜์˜€์œผ๋ฏ€๋กœ ๊ธฐํŒ(60)๊ณผ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ ๊ณต์ •์—์„œ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ฐœ์ƒ๋˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. The cathode electrode 66a is connected to the inner pad 67a and the conductive pad 68a through the through hole 65. The anode electrode 66b is connected to the inner pad 67b and the conductive pad 68b through the through hole 65. Both ends of the inner pads 67a and 67b are exposed to both sides of the substrate 60. The pattern electrode 66 is plated (for example, silver plated) by an electroplating process utilizing the inner pads 67a and 67b. The pattern electrodes 66a and 66b are not exposed to the side of the LED package as shown in FIG. 12, and both ends of the inner pads 67a and 67b are exposed to both sides of the substrate 60. The pattern electrodes 66a and 66b are not exposed so that the phosphor block 30 and the substrate (when performing a process for bonding the phosphor block 30 and the substrate 60 later (eg, oven curing, etc.) are performed. This is to prevent the interfacial separation between 60). That is, in the first embodiment, there are protrusions 22a and 24a (see FIG. 3), so that the interface separation occurs at the portion of the protrusion. In the second embodiment, since the protrusion is removed, the substrate 60 and the phosphor block 30 are removed. Interfacial separation does not occur in the bonding process of the liver.
๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b)๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€ ์ œ์กฐ๊ณต์ •์ค‘์— ์ธ์ ‘ํ•˜๋Š” ๋‹ค๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€์˜ ๋„๊ธˆ๋ผ์ธ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ์„ ์œ„ํ•ด ์ฃผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋œ๋‹ค. The inner pads 67a and 67b are mainly used for plating line connection with other adjacent LED packages during the LED package manufacturing process.
๋„ 12์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(90)๋ฅผ ์„ธ์šฐ์ง€ ์•Š๊ณ  ๋ˆ•ํžˆ๋Š” ๊ฒฝ์šฐ, ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b)๊ฐ€ ํ•˜์ธก์˜ PCB๊ธฐํŒ(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์„ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋„๋ก ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b)๋ฅผ ๋งค๊ฐœ๋กœ ํ•˜์ธก์˜ PCB๊ธฐํŒ(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์— ์†”๋”๋ง๋˜๊ฒŒ ํ•  ์ˆ˜๋„ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ด์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ํ•˜๋ฉด ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(90)์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์งํ•˜ํ˜• ๋ฐ ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๋„ 12์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(90)๋ฅผ ์„ธ์›Œ์„œ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ์งํ•˜ํ˜•์ด ๋˜๊ณ , ๋ˆ•ํ˜€์„œ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ์—์ง€ํ˜•์ด ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฌผ๋ก , ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅ์‹œ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(67a, 67b)์˜ ๋…ธ์ถœ ๋ถ€์œ„๊ฐ€ ๋„ˆ๋ฌด ์ž‘์•„์„œ ์†”๋”๋ง์ด ์—ฌ์˜์น˜ ์•Š์„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์†”๋”๋ง๋˜๋”๋ผ๋„ ์—์ง€ํ˜•์œผ๋กœ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์‹ค์žฅ๋œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(90)๊ฐ€ ์•ฝ๊ฐ„ ๊ธฐ์šธ์–ด์ง„ ์ƒํƒœ๋ฅผ ์œ ์ง€ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋”ฐ๋ผ์„œ, ๋„ 10 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 12์—๋Š” ๋„์‹œํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜์ง€๋งŒ, ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๋ฅผ ๊ธฐํŒ(60)์— ํ˜•์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด ๋ณด๋‹ค ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•˜๋‹ค.When the LED package 90 of FIG. 12 is laid down without standing, the lower PCB substrate (not shown) is directed to the lower PCB substrate (not shown) with the inner pads 67a and 67b facing the lower PCB substrate (not shown). May be soldered). In this way, it is possible to mount the LED package 90 to the direct type and the edge type. For example, as shown in FIG. 12, when the LED package 90 is erected and surface mounted, it becomes a direct type, and when it is placed on its surface, it becomes an edge type. Of course, when the surface is mounted to the edge type, the exposed portions of the inner pads 67a and 67b may be too small to solder. Even if soldered, the edge-mounted LED package 90 may be kept slightly inclined. Therefore, although not shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, it is more preferable to form the solder pad 23 of the first embodiment on the substrate 60.
์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์ด ํƒ‘์žฌ๋œ ๊ธฐํŒ(60)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์ด ์ ์ธต๋œ๋‹ค.The phosphor block 30 is stacked on the upper surface of the substrate 60 on which the LED chip 40 is mounted.
์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ๋ณ„๋„์˜ ๋ฐ˜์‚ฌํŒ์„ ๊ตฌ๋น„ํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š”๋‹ค. ๊ทธ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ, ๋„ 7์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์„ธ์šด ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ ๋ณด๋ฉด ์ขŒ์šฐ ์ธก๋ฉด(์ธก๋ฐฉ; a๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฉด(์ƒ๋ฐฉ; b๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์žฅ์ถ•์„ X์ถ•์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•˜๊ณ  ๋‹จ์ถ•์„ Y์ถ•์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ์„ค์ •ํ•˜๊ณ  X์ถ•๊ณผ Y์ถ•์˜ ๊ด‘๋„๋ฅผ ๋น„๊ตํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ณด๋ฉด ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ํ‘œ 1๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์€ ๊ฒฐ๊ณผ๋ฅผ ์–ป๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.The LED package according to the second embodiment does not have a separate reflector. Accordingly, when viewed in the upright state as shown in FIG. 7, light exit to the left and right side surfaces (side direction; a direction) and light exit to the upper surface (upward direction; b direction) are possible. When the long axis of the LED package of the second embodiment is set to the X axis and the short axis is set to the Y axis, and the luminance of the X axis and the Y axis is compared, the result shown in Table 1 is obtained.
์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์— ๋Œ€ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋„ 13์˜ ๋„๋ฉด์„ ์ฐธ์กฐํ•˜์—ฌ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๋ฉด ๋‹ค์Œ๊ณผ ๊ฐ™๋‹ค.A method of manufacturing the LED package according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings of FIG. 13 as follows.
๋จผ์ €, ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์„ ์ค€๋น„ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์€ ๋‹ค์ˆ˜์˜ ๊ธฐํŒ(60)์œผ๋กœ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•  ์ •๋„์˜ ํฌ๊ธฐ๋กœ ์ œ์กฐ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)์„ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์ƒ์— ์ ์ธต์‹œํ‚จ ํ›„์— ์ ˆ๋‹จํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๋‹ค์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ๋‹จํ’ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋กœ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋œ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋œ ๋‹จํ’ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋ฅผ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•˜๊ณ , ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž๊ฐ€ ์ฐจ์ง€ํ•˜๋Š” ์˜์—ญ์„ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์„ ์ค€๋น„ํ•œ๋‹ค๋ผ๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€, ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ์„ ๊ฐ–์ถ”๋˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๋ณ„๋กœ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๊ณ  ๋‚ด๋ถ€์— ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์„ ๊ฐ€๋กœ์ง€๋ฅด๋Š” ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๋ฉฐ, ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๋ณ„๋กœ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์„œ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์„ ์ค€๋น„ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ์ดํ•ดํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค.First, the base substrate 600 is prepared. The base substrate 600 is manufactured to a size that can be separated into a plurality of substrates (60). When the base phosphor block 300 is stacked on the base substrate 600 and then cut, the base phosphor block 300 is separated into a plurality of LED packages. The separated single package LED is called a unit element, and the area occupied by each unit element is called a unit element region. The preparation of the base substrate 600 includes a plurality of unit device regions, wherein a pattern electrode is formed on the upper surface of each unit device region, and a pad is formed across the pattern electrode. It is to be understood that the base substrates are electrically connected to each other.
๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์„ ์ œ์กฐํ•˜๋Š” ๊ณต์ •์€ ๋‹ค์Œ๊ณผ ๊ฐ™๋‹ค. ์†Œ์ •์˜ ์›๋ฃŒ ๋ถ„๋ง์„ ์ค€๋น„ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ๊ณต์—…์šฉ์œผ๋กœ ์‹œํŒํ•˜๊ณ  ์žˆ๋Š” ์œ ๋ฆฌ ์›๋ฃŒ๋ถ„๋ง(glass frit)์— ์—ฌ๋Ÿฌ๊ฐ€์ง€ ์ฒจ๊ฐ€์ œ๋ฅผ ์ฒจ๊ฐ€ํ•œ ์ €์˜จ๋™์‹œ์†Œ์„ฑ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน(LTCC) ์›๋ฃŒ ๋ถ„๋ง์ด๋‚˜ ์ ์ธต์นฉ์บํŒจ์‹œํ„ฐ(MLCC)์šฉ ์›๋ฃŒ ๋ถ„๋ง์„ ์ค€๋น„ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ค€๋น„๋œ ์›๋ฃŒ ๋ถ„๋ง์— PVB๊ณ„ ๋ฐ”์ธ๋”(binder)๋ฅผ ์›๋ฃŒ ๋ถ„๋ง ๋Œ€๋น„ ์•ฝ 6wt% ์ •๋„ ์ธก๋Ÿ‰ํ•œ ํ›„ ํ†จ๋ฃจ์—”/์•Œ์ฝ”์˜ฌ(toluene/alcohol)๊ณ„ ์†”๋ฒคํŠธ(solvent)์— ์šฉํ•ด์‹œ์ผœ ํˆฌ์ž…ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ ํ›„, ๋ณผ๋ฐ€๋กœ ์•ฝ 24์‹œ๊ฐ„ ๋™์•ˆ ๋ฐ€๋ง(milling) ๋ฐ ํ˜ผํ•ฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์Šฌ๋Ÿฌ๋ฆฌ(slurry)๋ฅผ ์ œ์กฐํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ์Šฌ๋Ÿฌ๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๋‹ฅํ„ฐ ๋ธ”๋ ˆ์ด๋“œ(doctor blade) ๋“ฑ์˜ ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•์œผ๋กœ ์›ํ•˜๋Š” ์‚ฌ์ด์ฆˆ์˜ ๋‹ค์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(๋„ 13์˜ (a)์˜ ์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(602)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ์‹œํŠธ)๋ฅผ ์ œ์กฐํ•œ๋‹ค. ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ์—๋Š” ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๋ณ„๋กœ ์„œ๋กœ ์ด๊ฒฉ๋œ 2๊ฐœ์˜ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์ด ์ƒํ•˜ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์€ ํŽ€์นญ ์ž‘์—…์— ์˜ํ•ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์˜ ๋‚ด๋ถ€์—๋Š” ๋„์ „์„ฑ ๋ฌผ์งˆ์ด ์ถฉ์ „๋œ๋‹ค. The process of manufacturing the base substrate 600 is as follows. The predetermined raw material powder is prepared. That is, low-temperature co-fired ceramic (LTCC) raw material powders and multilayer chip capacitor (MLCC) raw material powders prepared by adding various additives to commercially available glass frit are prepared. PVB-based binder (binder) to the prepared raw material powder is measured by about 6wt% relative to the raw material powder and dissolved in toluene / alcohol (toluene / alcohol) solvent (solvent) is added. The mill is then milled and mixed with a ball mill for about 24 hours to produce a slurry. This slurry is produced by a method such as a doctor blade and a plurality of molded sheets (sheets such as the molded sheet 602 of Fig. 13A) of a desired size. In each molded sheet, two through holes 65 spaced apart from each other by unit device regions are formed in the vertical direction. The through hole 65 is formed by a punching operation. The conductive material is filled in the through hole 65.
๋‹ค์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ๊ฐ€ ์ œ์กฐ๋˜๋ฉด ๋„ 13์˜ (a)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ตœํ•˜์ธต์˜ ์ œ 1์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(601)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ์ œ 2์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(602)๋ฅผ ์ ์ธตํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋ฌผ๋ก , ์ œ 1์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(601)์™€ ์ œ 2์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(602)์˜ ๋‘๊ป˜๋ฅผ ํ•ฉ์นœ ๋‘๊ป˜๋ฅผ ๊ฐ–๋Š” ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ๋ฅผ ์‚ฌ์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ๋„ ๋œ๋‹ค.When a plurality of molded sheets are manufactured, the second molded sheet 602 is laminated on the upper surface of the first molded sheet 601 of the lowermost layer as shown in FIG. Of course, one molded sheet having a thickness of the combined thickness of the first molded sheet 601 and the second molded sheet 602 may be used.
์ด์–ด, ๋„ 13์˜ (b)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ œ 2์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(602)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ์„ธ๋กœ ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ๊ธˆ์† ์žฌ์งˆ์˜ ๋ฐ•ํŽธ์ธ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(671, 672, 673, 674)๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(671)๋Š” ์ œ 2์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(602)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ์ œ์ผ ์ขŒ์ธก์— ์„ธ๋กœ๋กœ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด๋œ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์„ ๋ฎ๋Š”๋‹ค. ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(672)๋Š” ์ œ 2์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(602)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ์ขŒ์ธก์—์„œ ๋‘๋ฒˆ์งธ๋กœ ์„ธ๋กœ๋กœ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด๋œ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์„ ๋ฎ๋Š”๋‹ค. ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(673)๋Š” ์ œ 2์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(602)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ์ขŒ์ธก์—์„œ ์„ธ๋ฒˆ์งธ๋กœ ์„ธ๋กœ๋กœ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด๋œ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์„ ๋ฎ๋Š”๋‹ค. ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(674)๋Š” ์ œ 2์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(602)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ์ขŒ์ธก์—์„œ ๋„ค๋ฒˆ์งธ(์ฆ‰, ์ œ์ผ ์˜ค๋ฅธ์ชฝ)๋กœ ์„ธ๋กœ๋กœ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด๋œ ์Šค๋ฃจ ํ™€(65)์„ ๋ฎ๋Š”๋‹ค.Next, as illustrated in FIG. 13B, inner pads 671, 672, 673, and 674, which are thin metal foils, are formed on the upper surface of the second molding sheet 602 in the vertical direction. That is, the inner pad 671 covers the through holes 65 vertically arranged on the leftmost side of the upper surface of the second molding sheet 602. The inner pad 672 covers the through holes 65 arranged in a row from the left side to the second length side on the top surface of the second molding sheet 602. The inner pad 673 covers the through holes 65 arranged in a row from the top of the second molding sheet 602 to the third from the left. The inner pad 674 covers the through holes 65 arranged in a row from the top of the second molding sheet 602 to the fourth from the left (ie, the rightmost).
์ด์–ด, ๋„ 13์˜ (c)์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ œ 3์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(603) ๋ฐ ์ œ 4์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(604)๋ฅผ ์ฐจ๋ก€๋Œ€๋กœ ์ ์ธต์‹œํ‚จ๋‹ค. ์ดํ›„, ๊ทธ ์ ์ธต๋œ ๋‹ค์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ๋ฅผ ์••์ฐฉํ•œ๋‹ค.Next, as shown in FIG. 13C, the third molding sheet 603 and the fourth molding sheet 604 are sequentially stacked. Thereafter, the laminated plurality of molded sheets is pressed.
์ด์–ด, ๋„ 13์˜ (d)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ œ 4์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(604)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(661, 662, 663, 664)์„ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•œ๋‹ค. ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(661, 662, 663, 664)์€ ๋„์ „์„ฑ ํŽ˜์ด์ŠคํŠธ๋ฅผ ์‹คํฌ ์Šคํฌ๋ฆฐ์„ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ธ์‡„ํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(661, 662)์ด ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๊ณ , ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(663, 664)์ด ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ์—ฌ๊ธฐ์„œ, ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(661, 662, 663, 664)์€ ์™„์„ฑ๋œ ๋‹จํ’ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(66)์œผ๋กœ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68a, 68b)์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ๋ณ„๋„๋กœ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋Š”๋ฐ, ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68a, 68b)๋Š” ์ดํ•˜์˜ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž ํƒ‘์žฌ๋™์ž‘์ด ์ˆ˜ํ–‰๋˜๊ธฐ ์ „์— ์ œ 1์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(601)์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์— ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฌผ๋ก , ํ•„์š”์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ์„œ๋Š” ๋‹จํ’ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๊ฐ€ ์ œ์กฐ๋œ ์ดํ›„์— ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๋‹จํ’ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋งˆ๋‹ค ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68a, 68b)๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜์—ฌ๋„ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ(68a, 68b)์˜ ํ˜•์„ฑ ์‹œ์ ์€ ์ƒํ™ฉ์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ ๋‹ฌ๋ผ์งˆ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋„ 13์˜ (d)์—๋Š” ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์ฐธ์กฐ๋ถ€ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ๊ธฐ์žฌํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜์ง€๋งŒ, ์ œ 1 ~ ์ œ 4์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(601, 602, 603, 604)๋ฅผ ํ†ต์นญํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์ธ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ์ดํ•ดํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค.Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 13D, pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, and 664 are formed on the upper surface of the fourth molding sheet 604. The pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, 664 can be formed by printing the conductive paste using a silk screen. Pattern electrodes 661 and 662 are formed in one unit element region, and pattern electrodes 663 and 664 are formed in one unit element region. Here, the pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, 664 are the pattern electrodes 66 of the completed LED package. Although the conductive pads 68a and 68b have not been described separately, the conductive pads 68a and 68b may be formed on the bottom surface of the first molding sheet 601 before the following light emitting element mounting operation is performed. Of course, you may form the conductive pads 68a and 68b for each LED package after each LED package is manufactured as needed. The formation timings of the conductive pads 68a and 68b may vary depending on the situation. Although reference numerals for the base substrates are not described in FIG. 13D, the first to fourth molding sheets 601, 602, 603, and 604 may be collectively understood as the base substrate 600.
์ดํ›„, ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ(671, 672, 673, 674)๋ฅผ ํ™œ์šฉํ•œ ์ „๊ธฐ๋„๊ธˆ ๊ณต์ •์— ์˜ํ•ด ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(661, 662, 663, 664)์„ ๋„๊ธˆ(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, ์€๋„๊ธˆ)์ฒ˜๋ฆฌํ•œ๋‹ค.Thereafter, the pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, and 664 are plated (eg, silver plated) by an electroplating process using the inner pads 671, 672, 673, and 674.
์ด์–ด, ๋„ 13์˜ (e)์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์— ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์„ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์€ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์—์„œ ์ƒ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ฒฝ๊ณ„์„ ์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์†Œ์ •์น˜ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์€ ์—ญ ๋ธŒ์ด์ž ํ˜•ํƒœ๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Ÿฌํ•œ ์—ญ ๋ธŒ์ด์ž ํ˜•ํƒœ์˜ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์€ ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์žฌ์งˆ์˜ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์— ํ™ˆ์„ ๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์žฅ๋น„๋ฅผ ์ด์šฉํ•˜๋ฉด ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์€ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์—๋งŒ ํ˜•์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•˜๋‹ค. ์™œ๋ƒํ•˜๋ฉด, ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)๊ณผ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์˜ ๋‹จ๋‹จํ•จ์ด ์„œ๋กœ ๋‹ค๋ฅด๋‹ค. ํ•œ ์ข…๋ฅ˜์˜ ํ™ˆ ํ˜•์„ฑ ๋„๊ตฌ๋กœ ์ด์ข…์˜ ๋ธ”๋ก ๋ชจ๋‘์— ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์„ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์€ ๊ทธ๋ฆฌ ๋ฐ”๋žŒ์งํ•˜์ง€ ๋ชปํ•˜๋‹ค.Subsequently, a splitting groove 70 is formed in the bottom surface of the base substrate as shown in FIG. 13E. The cleavage groove 70 is formed at a predetermined value along a boundary line between the unit device regions in an upward direction from the bottom of the base substrate 600. For example, the splitting groove 70 is formed in an inverted V shape. The inverted V-shaped split groove 70 may be sufficiently formed by using a device that can groove the base substrate 600 made of a ceramic material. It is preferable to form the splitting groove 70 only in the base substrate 600. This is because the rigidity of the base phosphor block 300 and the base substrate 600 are different from each other. It is not so desirable to form the splitting grooves 70 in all of the heterogeneous blocks with one type of groove forming tool.
์•ž์„œ ์‹ค์‹œํ•œ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(661, 662, 663, 664)์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ๋„๊ธˆ ๊ณต์ •์„ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70) ํ˜•์„ฑ ๊ณต์ • ์ดํ›„์— ์‹ค์‹œํ•˜์—ฌ๋„ ๋ฌด๋ฐฉํ•˜๋‹ค. The plating process for the pattern electrodes 661, 662, 663, and 664 described above may be performed after the cleavage groove 70 forming process.
์ดํ›„, ๋„ 13์˜ (e)์˜ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์„ ์†Œ๊ฒฐํ•œ๋‹ค.Thereafter, the base substrate 600 of FIG. 13E is sintered.
์ด์–ด, ๋„ 13์˜ (f)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๋ณ„๋กœ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž(40)๋ฅผ ํƒ‘์žฌํ•œ ํ›„์— ์™€์ด์–ด ๋ณธ๋”ฉ์„ ์‹ค์‹œํ•œ๋‹ค.Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13F, after the light emitting device 40 is mounted in each unit device region, wire bonding is performed.
๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ  ๋‚˜์„œ, ๋„ 13์˜ (g)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž(40)๊ฐ€ ํƒ‘์žฌ๋œ ์ œ 4์„ฑํ˜• ์‹œํŠธ(604)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)์„ ๋ชฐ๋”ฉ๋ฐฉ์‹ ๋“ฑ์œผ๋กœ ์ ์ธต์‹œ์ผœ ์ ์ธต์ฒด(700)๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)์€ ๋‹ค์ˆ˜์˜ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30)์œผ๋กœ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•  ์ •๋„์˜ ํฌ๊ธฐ๋กœ ์ œ์กฐ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)์€ ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜(๋˜๋Š” ์—ํญ์‹œ) ๋ฐ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด๋ฅผ ํ˜ผํ•ฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์›ํ•˜๋Š” ์‚ฌ์ด์ฆˆ๋กœ ์ œ์กฐํ•˜๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)์€ ํ•„์š”์— ๋”ฐ๋ผ์„œ๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด๋ฅผ ์ œ์™ธํ•˜๊ณ  ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜(๋˜๋Š” ์—ํญ์‹œ)์œผ๋กœ ์ œ์กฐ๋˜๊ธฐ๋„ ํ•˜๊ณ , ์‹ค ๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜(๋˜๋Š” ์—ํญ์‹œ) ๋ฐ ๋””ํ“จ์ €์˜ ํ˜ผํ•ฉ์œผ๋กœ ์ œ์กฐ๋˜๊ธฐ๋„ ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)๊ณผ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์€ ์˜ค๋ธ ํ์–ด๋ง ๋“ฑ์˜ ๋ฐฉ์‹์œผ๋กœ ์„œ๋กœ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์‹œ ๋งํ•ด์„œ, ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์˜ ํ‘œ๋ฉด์˜ ํ…Œ๋‘๋ฆฌ๋ฅผ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์†Œ์ • ๋†’์ด์˜ ๋Œ(dam)(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต) ๋˜๋Š” ๊ธˆํ˜• ํ‹€(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์„ ์„ค์น˜ํ•˜์—ฌ ๋””์ŠคํŽœ์‹ฑ ์˜์—ญ์„ ํ™•๋ณดํ•œ ํ›„์— ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด์™€ ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜ ๋“ฑ์˜ ํ˜ผํ•ฉ๋ฌผ์„ ๋””์ŠคํŽœ์‹ฑ ์˜์—ญ์— ๋””์ŠคํŽœ์‹ฑํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋””์ŠคํŽœ์‹ฑ์— ์˜ํ•ด ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด์™€ ์‹ค๋ฆฌ์ฝ˜ ๋“ฑ์˜ ํ˜ผํ•ฉ๋ฌผ๋กœ ๋œ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด์ธต(๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์ด ๋˜๋Š” ๋ถ€๋ถ„์ž„)์ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๋Š” ํ˜•๊ตญ์ด ๋œ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ ํ›„, ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, ๋Œ€๋žต 70โ„ƒ์˜ ์˜จ๋„๋กœ ๋Œ€๋žต 30๋ถ„ ์ •๋„์˜ ์˜ค๋ธ ํ์–ด๋ง์„ ์‹ค์‹œํ•˜๋ฉด์„œ ๋””์ŠคํŽœ์‹ฑ๋œ ํ˜ผํ•ฉ๋ฌผ์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ๊ธฐํฌ ์ œ๊ฑฐ ๊ณต์ •์„ ํ–‰ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๊ธฐํฌ ์ œ๊ฑฐ ๊ณต์ •ํ›„์— ๋Œ ๋˜๋Š” ๊ธˆํ˜• ํ‹€์„ ์ œ๊ฑฐํ•˜๊ณ  ๋‚˜์„œ ์ตœ์ข…์ ์ธ ํ์–ด๋ง(์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด, 70โ„ƒ ์ •๋„์—์„œ 1์‹œ๊ฐ„ ์ •๋„ ํ์–ด๋งํ•œ ํ›„์— 150โ„ƒ ์ •๋„์—์„œ 1์‹œ๊ฐ„ ์ •๋„ ํ์–ด๋ง)์„ ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๋„ 13์˜ (g)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ์ ์ธต์ฒด(700)๊ฐ€ ์™„์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. Then, as shown in FIG. 13G, the base phosphor block 300 is laminated on the upper surface of the fourth molding sheet 604 on which the light emitting device 40 is mounted, for example, by molding or the like, to form the laminate 700. do. The base phosphor block 300 is manufactured to a size that can be separated into a plurality of phosphor blocks 30. The base phosphor block 300 may be manufactured in a desired size by mixing silicon (or epoxy) and phosphor. The base phosphor block 300 may be made of silicon (or epoxy), except for phosphor, if necessary, or may be made of a mixture of silicon (or epoxy) and a diffuser. For example, the base phosphor block 300 and the base substrate 600 are coupled to each other by, for example, oven curing. In other words, a dam (not shown) or a mold frame (not shown) having a predetermined height is provided along the edge of the surface of the base substrate 600 to secure a dispensing area, and then a mixture of phosphor and silicon is dispensed. Dispensing in the fencing area. By dispensing, the upper surface of the base substrate 600 is a mold station in which a phosphor layer made of a mixture of phosphor and silicon (part of which becomes a base phosphor block) is formed. Thereafter, for example, an air bubble removing process for the dispensed mixture is performed while oven curing is performed for about 30 minutes at a temperature of approximately 70 ยฐ C. After removing the dam or mold mold after the bubble removing process, the final curing (for example, curing at about 70 ยฐ C. for about 1 hour and curing at about 150 ยฐ C. for 1 hour) is shown in FIG. A laminate 700 such as) is completed.
์ด์–ด, ๋„ 13์˜ (h)์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ ์ธต์ฒด(700)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด ์ฆ‰, ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ฒฝ๊ณ„์„ ์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์†Œ์ • ๊นŠ์ด๋กœ ์†Œ์ž‰ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ(80)์„ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•œ๋‹ค. ์—ฌ๊ธฐ์„œ, ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ(80)์€ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์— ๊ทผ์ ‘๋  ์ •๋„์˜ ๊นŠ์ด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์˜ ๋†’์ด(๊นŠ์ด)์™€ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ(80)์˜ ๊นŠ์ด๋ฅผ ์˜ˆ์‹œํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์€ ๊ฒƒ์€ ์™„์„ฑ์‹œํ‚ฌ ๋‹จํ’ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์‚ฌ์ด์ฆˆ๊ฐ€ ์—ฌ๋Ÿฌ ์ข…๋ฅ˜์ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ธฐ ๋•Œ๋ฌธ์— ์ผ์ผ์ด ์˜ˆ์‹œํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์•˜๋‹ค. ์•ž์„œ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)์— ๊ทผ์ ‘๋  ์ •๋„์˜ ๊นŠ์ด๋ผ ํ•จ์€, ์ดํ›„์˜ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ๊ณผ์ •์—์„œ ์ ์ธต์ฒด(700)์— ๊ธฐ๊ณ„์  ๋˜๋Š” ์ธ์œ„์ ์œผ๋กœ ํž˜์„ ๊ฐ€ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)๊ณผ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ(80)์— ์˜ํ•ด ์ ์ธต์ฒด(700)๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž๋กœ ์‰ฝ๊ฒŒ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์„ ์ •๋„์˜ ๊นŠ์ด๋ฅผ ์˜๋ฏธํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š” ํ’€ ์†Œ์ž‰์ด ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ํ•˜ํ”„ ์†Œ์ž‰(half sawing)์ด๋ž„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ •๋„์˜ ๋‘๊ป˜๋งŒํผ์„ ์†Œ์ž‰ํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ ์†Œ์ž‰ ์†๋„๋ฅผ ๋ณด๋‹ค ๊ณ ์†(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, 20 ~ 30mm/s ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์†๋„)์œผ๋กœ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์–ด ์™„์ œํ’ˆ์„ ์ œ์กฐํ•˜๊ธฐ๊นŒ์ง€์˜ ์‹œ๊ฐ„์„ ๋‹จ์ถ•์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ํ•˜ํ”„ ์†Œ์ž‰์ด๋ž„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ •๋„์˜ ๋‘๊ป˜๋งŒํผ์„ ์†Œ์ž‰ํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ, ์ข…๋ž˜์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์†Œ์ž‰์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ์นผ๋‚ (๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์˜ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ˆ˜๋ช…์ด ๊ธธ์–ด์ง„๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ์„ธ๋ผ๋ฏน ์žฌ์งˆ์˜ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์— ๋น„ํ•ด ๋œ ๋‹จ๋‹จํ•œ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300)์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด ๋ณด๋‹ค ๊ณ ์†์œผ๋กœ ์†Œ์ž‰ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฏ€๋กœ, ๊ธฐ์กด์˜ ํ’€ ์†Œ์ž‰์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์™„์ œํ’ˆ์„ ์ œ์กฐํ•˜๊ธฐ๊นŒ์ง€์˜ ์‹œ๊ฐ„์„ ๋‹จ์ถ•์‹œํ‚ฌ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์„ ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ์นผ๋‚ ์˜ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ˆ˜๋ช…์ด ๊ธธ์–ด์ง€๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋‹ค์‹œ ๋งํ•ด์„œ, ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ๋Š” ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300) ๋ฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์— ๋Œ€ํ•œ ์†Œ์ž‰์„ ๊ฐ๊ฐ ๋ณ„๊ฐœ๋กœ ์ง„ํ–‰ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋•Œ, ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(300) ๋ฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(600)์— ์ตœ์ ์ธ ์ €๋งˆ๋‹ค์˜ ์†Œ์ž‰์†๋„๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ณตํ•ด ์ค„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฏ€๋กœ, ๋ฌด๋ฆฌํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์†Œ์ž‰ ์ž‘์—…์„ ํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š์•„๋„ ๋˜๊ณ  ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์‹œ๊ฐ„ ๋‹จ์ถ• ๋ฐ ์นผ๋‚ ์˜ ์ˆ˜๋ช… ์—ฐ์žฅ์˜ ํšจ๊ณผ๋ฅผ ์–ป๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.Subsequently, as shown in (h) of FIG. 13, the cutting groove 80 is formed by sawing a predetermined depth along the boundary line between the unit element regions on the upper surface of the stack 700, that is, the upper surface of the base phosphor block 300. Here, the cutting groove 80 is formed to a depth close to the splitting groove 70. In the exemplary embodiment of the present invention, the height (depth) of the splitting groove 70 and the depth of the cutting groove 80 are not exemplified because the size of the LED package of the single piece to be completed may be various. The depth enough to be close to the above-described splitting groove 70 is laminated by the splitting groove 70 and the cutting groove 80 by applying mechanical or artificial force to the stack 700 in a subsequent separation process. It means a depth that the sieve 700 can be easily separated into each unit element. In the embodiment of the present invention, the sawing speed is not so much as full sawing, but as half sawing (half sawing), so that the sawing speed can be made higher speed (for example, 20 ~ 30mm / s or more) to produce a finished product You can shorten the time to. Then, since the sawing is as thin as half sawing, the service life of the blade (not shown) for sawing is longer than in the past. That is, because the base phosphor block 300 which is less rigid than the ceramic base substrate 600 can be sawed at a higher speed, the time required to manufacture the finished product as well as the conventional full sawing can be shortened. The service life of the blade will be extended. In other words, in the second embodiment, sawing for the base phosphor block 300 and the base substrate 600 is performed separately. In this case, since the optimum sawing speed may be provided to the base phosphor block 300 and the base substrate 600, the sawing operation may not be performed excessively, and the above-described time reduction and life extension of the blade may be obtained.
๋งˆ์ง€๋ง‰์œผ๋กœ, ๋„ 13์˜ (i)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์ ์ธต์ฒด(700)์— ๊ธฐ๊ณ„์  ๋˜๋Š” ์ธ์œ„์ ์œผ๋กœ ํž˜์„ ๊ฐ€ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ(70)๊ณผ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ(80)์— ์˜ํ•ด ์ ์ธต์ฒด(700)๋ฅผ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž(90)๋กœ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌํ•ด ๋‚ธ๋‹ค. ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋œ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž(90)๊ฐ€ ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ ์–ป๊ณ ์ž ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฆฌํ”Œ๋ ‰ํ„ฐ๊ฐ€ ์—†๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์ด๋‹ค.Finally, as shown in (i) of FIG. 13, the unit 700 is formed by the split grooves 70 and the cutting grooves 80 by mechanically or artificially applying a force to the stack 700. To separate. Each separate unit element 90 is a reflector-free LED package that is desired to be obtained in the second embodiment.
์ด์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ์˜ํ•˜๋ฉด, ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ์–‘์ธก๋ถ€๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋˜ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์—์„œ์˜ ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ฑฐํ•จ์œผ๋กœ์จ ๊ธฐํŒ๊ณผ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ณ„๋ฉด๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ํ˜„์ƒ์„ ์™„์ „ํžˆ ์ œ๊ฑฐํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. According to this second embodiment, the interface separation phenomenon between the substrate and the phosphor block can be completely eliminated by removing the protrusions in the first embodiment, which are exposed from both sides of the upper surface of the substrate.
ํ’€ ์†Œ์ž‰์ด ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ํ•˜ํ”„ ์†Œ์ž‰(half sawing)์ด๋ž„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ •๋„์˜ ๋‘๊ป˜๋งŒํผ์„ ์†Œ์ž‰ํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ ์†Œ์ž‰ ์†๋„๋ฅผ ๋ณด๋‹ค ๊ณ ์†(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, 20 ~ 30mm/s ์ด์ƒ์˜ ์†๋„)์œผ๋กœ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์–ด ์™„์ œํ’ˆ์„ ์ œ์กฐํ•˜๊ธฐ๊นŒ์ง€์˜ ์‹œ๊ฐ„์ด ๋‹จ์ถ•๋œ๋‹ค. ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ํ’€ ์†Œ์ž‰ ๋ฐฉ์‹์ด ์•„๋‹ˆ๊ณ  ํ•˜ํ”„ ์†Œ์ž‰์ด๋ž„ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋Š” ์ •๋„์˜ ๋‘๊ป˜๋งŒํผ์„ ์†Œ์ž‰ํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ, ์ข…๋ž˜์— ๋น„ํ•ด ์†Œ์ž‰์„ ์œ„ํ•œ ์นผ๋‚ ์˜ ์‚ฌ์šฉ์ˆ˜๋ช…์ด ๊ธธ์–ด์ง„๋‹ค.By sawing as much as half sawing, rather than full sawing, the sawing speed can be made faster (e.g., 20 to 30 mm / s or more), resulting in a shorter time to manufacture the finished product. . It is not the conventional full sawing method, but the sawing of the thickness as much as half sawing, so that the service life of the blade for sawing is longer than in the past.
๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜ ๋ฐ ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜ ๋“ฑ์— ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ๊ด‘์›์œผ๋กœ์„œ์˜ ์—ญํ• ์„ ํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ์œผ๋ฏ€๋กœ, 120๋„ ์ด์ƒ์˜ ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์š”๊ตฌํ•˜๋Š” ํ‰ํŒํ˜• ํ‘œ์‹œ์žฅ์น˜ ๋ฐ ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜ ๋“ฑ์— ๋งค์šฐ ํšจ๊ณผ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์‚ฌ์šฉ๋œ๋‹ค. In addition, since the LED package of the second embodiment can sufficiently serve as a light source for a flat panel display device and a lighting device, the LED package is effectively used for a flat panel display device and a lighting device requiring a wide directivity angle of 120 degrees or more.
๋„ 14๋Š” ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‘์šฉ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์˜ˆ์ธ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ ๋ฐ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์ด ์„ค์น˜๋œ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋ฅผ ๋ณด์—ฌ์ฃผ๋Š” ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค. 14 is a view showing a light emitting module and a backlight unit in which the light emitting module is installed, which is an example of an application device of the present invention.
๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์€ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์— ๋น„ํ•ด ๋ณด๋‹ค ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๊ฐ–์Œ์„ ๋ฌผ๋ก  ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ(๋˜๋Š” ์‚ฌ์ด๋“œ ์—๋ฏธํŒ… ํŠน์„ฑ)์„ ์ง€๋‹Œ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๊ฐ–๋„๋ก ํ•จ์„ ์ฃผ์š” ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋ฅผ ๊ตฌํ˜„ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•ด, ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์€ ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50, 52)์„ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์„ธํŠธ๋กœ ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50, 52)์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด์„œ๋Š” ํ›„์ˆ ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์—ฌ๊ธฐ์„œ์˜ ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์€ ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋กœ ์ดํ•ดํ•˜์—ฌ๋„ ๋œ๋‹ค.The light output module 54 is characterized in that it has a wider direct angle than the direct angle of the conventional LED package, as well as a direct angle having a batwing characteristic (or side emitting characteristic). To implement this, the light output module 54 sets two light modules 50 and 52 into one set. The optical modules 50 and 52 are mentioned later. The optical module here may be understood as the LED package of the first or second embodiment described above.
๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์€ ์˜ˆ๋ฅผ ๋“ค์–ด ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์— ์„ค์น˜๋œ๋‹ค. ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์˜ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ(10)์ƒ์—๋Š” ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์˜ ์ €๋ฉด๊ณผ ์ œ 2 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(52)์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์ด ์„œ๋กœ ๋Œ€ํ–ฅ๋˜๋„๋ก ์„ค์น˜๋œ๋‹ค. The light output module 54 is installed in the backlight unit, for example. On the base substrate 10 of the backlight unit, the bottom surface of the first optical module 50 and the bottom surface of the second optical module 52 are installed to face each other.
๋„ 15 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 17์€ ๋„ 14์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์˜ ์–ด๋Š ํ•œ ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค. ๋„ 18์€ ๋„ 17์˜ ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ์ƒํƒœ๋„์ด๋‹ค. ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์„ ๊ตฌ์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)๊ณผ ์ œ 2 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(52)์€ ์„œ๋กœ ๋™์ผํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ๋˜์–ด ์žˆ์œผ๋ฏ€๋กœ, ์ดํ•˜์—์„œ๋Š” ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด ์„ค๋ช…ํ•œ๋‹ค. ์ œ 2 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(52)์€ ํ›„์ˆ ํ•˜๋Š” ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ ์„ค๋ช…์œผ๋กœ ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ํŒŒ์•…๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ์ œ 1๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์€ ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1 ๋ฐ ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€ ๊ฑฐ์˜ ๋Œ€๋™์†Œ์ดํ•˜๋ฏ€๋กœ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ์š”์†Œ๋ณ„๋กœ ์ฐธ์กฐ๋ถ€ํ˜ธ๋ฅผ ๋™์ผํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋ถ€์—ฌํ•˜๊ณ  ์ƒ์„ธํ•œ ์„ค๋ช…์€ ์ƒ๋žตํ•œ๋‹ค.15 to 17 are views for explaining the configuration of any one optical module of the light output module of FIG. 18 is a state diagram of FIG. Since the first optical module 50 and the second optical module 52 constituting the light output module are configured in the same manner, the configuration of the first optical module 50 will be described below. The 2nd optical module 52 can fully grasp | ascertain with the structural description of the 1st optical module 50 mentioned later. Since the first optical module 50 is almost the same as the LED packages of the first and second embodiments described above, the same reference numerals are given for each component and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์€ ๊ธฐํŒ(20), ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก(30), ๋ฐ ์—˜์ด๋”” ์นฉ(40)์„ ํฌํ•จํ•œ๋‹ค.The first optical module 50 includes a substrate 20, a phosphor block 30, and an LED chip 40.
์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์„ ๋„ 18์˜ ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23) ๋ถ€๋ถ„์ด PCB๊ธฐํŒ(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์„ ํ–ฅํ•˜๋„๋ก 90๋„ ์˜†์œผ๋กœ ๋ˆ•ํ˜€์„œ ์‹ค์žฅ์‹œํ‚ค๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๊ธฐํŒ(20)์˜ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ(23)๊ฐ€ ํ•˜๋ถ€์˜ PCB๊ธฐํŒ(๋„์‹œ ์ƒ๋žต)์— ์†”๋”๋ง๋œ๋‹ค. In the state of FIG. 18, when the first optical module 50 is mounted with the solder pad 23 portion sideways to the side of the PCB substrate (not shown), the solder pad 23 of the substrate 20 is lowered. It is soldered to a PCB substrate (not shown).
๋„ 15 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 18์—์„œ์˜ ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์„ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€ ๋น„๊ตํ•˜๋ฉด ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน(22, 24)์˜ ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a)๋ฅผ ์ œ๊ฑฐํ•˜์˜€๋‹ค๋Š” ์ ์ด ์•ฝ๊ฐ„ ์ฐจ์ด๋‚œ๋‹ค. ๋™์ข…์—…๊ณ„์— ์ข…์‚ฌํ•˜๋Š” ์ž๋ผ๋ฉด ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ ๋ฐ ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์„ค๋ช…์„ ํ† ๋Œ€๋กœ ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์˜ ๊ตฌ์„ฑ ๋ฐ ์ œ์กฐ๊ณต์ •์„ ์‰ฝ๊ฒŒ ์œ ์ถ”ํ•ด ๋‚ผ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ๋Œ์ถœ๋ถ€(22a, 24a) ์ œ๊ฑฐ ์ž‘์—…์€ ๋™์ข…์—…๊ณ„์— ์ข…์‚ฌํ•˜๋Š” ์ž๋ผ๋ฉด ์ฃผ์ง€์˜ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ๋กœ ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค.When the first optical module 50 in FIGS. 15 to 18 is compared with the LED package of the first embodiment, the protrusions 22a and 24a of the pattern electrodes 22 and 24 are slightly removed. Those skilled in the art can easily infer the configuration and manufacturing process of the first optical module 50 based on the description of the first and second embodiments described above. And it is possible to fully remove the protrusions 22a and 24a by a well-known technique for those skilled in the same industry.
๋”ฐ๋ผ์„œ, ๋„ 15 ๋‚ด์ง€ ๋„ 18์—์„œ์˜ ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์„ ์ œ 1์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ ๋˜๋Š” ์ œ 2์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์™€ ๋Œ€๋™์†Œ์ดํ•œ ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ๋ณด์•„๋„ ๋ฌด๋ฐฉํ•˜๋‹ค. Therefore, the first optical module 50 in FIGS. 15 to 18 may be regarded as substantially the same as the LED package of the first or second embodiment.
ํ•œํŽธ, ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์€ ๋„ 7์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ์„ธ์šด ์ƒํƒœ์—์„œ ๋ณด๋ฉด ์ขŒ์šฐ ์ธก๋ฉด(a๋ฐฉํ–ฅ; ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ฐ ์ƒ๋ฉด(b๋ฐฉํ–ฅ; ์ƒ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ)์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค. ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)์˜ ์žฅ์ถ•์„ X์ถ•์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•˜๊ณ  ๋‹จ์ถ•์„ Y์ถ•์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ์„ค์ •ํ•˜๊ณ  X์ถ•๊ณผ Y์ถ•์˜ ๊ด‘๋„๋ฅผ ๋น„๊ตํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ณด๋ฉด ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ํ‘œ 1๊ณผ ๊ฐ™์€ ๊ฒฐ๊ณผ๋ฅผ ์–ป๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.On the other hand, the first optical module 50 in the standing state as shown in Figure 7 can be emitted to the left and right side (a direction; lateral direction) and the light output to the upper surface (b direction; upward direction). When the long axis of the first optical module 50 is set as the X axis and the short axis is set as the Y axis, and the luminance of the X axis and the Y axis is compared, the result shown in Table 1 is obtained.
์ด์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์€ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘ ๋Œ€๋น„ ์ธก๋ฐฉ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์˜ ๊ด‘๋„๊ฐ€ ๋Œ€๋žต 50% ์ •๋„์ธ ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50)๊ณผ ์ œ 2 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(52)์„ ๋ˆ•ํžˆ๋ฉด ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๋„ 14์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ฆ‰, ๋„ 14์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋ฐฐ์น˜ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์€ ์ƒ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ๋ชจ๋‘ ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. In this way, the light output module 54 may lay the first optical module 50 and the second optical module 52 having about 50% of the luminous intensity of the upper side emission compared to the upper side emission. In this way, it is as shown in FIG. That is, when arranged as shown in FIG. 14, the light output module 54 may emit light in the upward direction and the lateral direction.
์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50) ๋ฐ ์ œ 2 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(52)์„ ๋ˆ•ํ˜€์„œ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(50) ๋ฐ ์ œ 2 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(52)์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์ด ์ธก๋ฉด์ด ๋˜๋Š” ํ˜•ํƒœ์ด๋ฏ€๋กœ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์˜ ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์˜ ๊ด‘๋„๊ฐ€ ๋” ํฌ๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋กœ ์ธํ•ด ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ์–ป๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.When the first optical module 50 and the second optical module 52 are laid side by side, the upper surface of the first optical module 50 and the second optical module 52 is a side surface, so that the light exit module 54 The luminance of the lateral light emission becomes larger. This results in batwing characteristics.
๋„ 14์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๊ตฌํ˜„๋œ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์„ ์ธก๊ฐ๊ธฐ(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, OL770 goniometer)๋กœ ์ธก์ •ํ•˜์—ฌ ์–ป์€ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ์‹œํŠธ๋ฅผ ๊ทผ๊ฑฐ๋กœ ํ•œ ๊ทน์ขŒํ‘œ ํ˜•ํƒœ์˜ ๋ฐฐ๊ด‘๊ณก์€ ๋„ 19์™€ ๊ฐ™๋‹ค. ๊ทธ๋ฆฌ๊ณ , ๋„ 14์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๊ตฌํ˜„๋œ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์„ ์ธก๊ฐ๊ธฐ(์˜ˆ์ปจ๋Œ€, OL770 goniometer)๋กœ ์ธก์ •ํ•˜์—ฌ ์–ป์€ ๋ฐ์ดํ„ฐ์‹œํŠธ๋ฅผ ๊ทผ๊ฑฐ๋กœ ํ•œ ์ง๊ต ์ขŒํ‘œ ํ˜•ํƒœ์˜ ๋ฐฐ๊ด‘๊ณก์„ ์€ ๋„ 20๊ณผ ๊ฐ™๋‹ค. ๋„ 19 ๋ฐ ๋„ 20์„ ๋ณด๊ฒŒ ๋˜๋ฉด ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์€ ๋Œ€๋žต 170๋„ ์ •๋„์˜ ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๊ฐ–์Œ์„ ์•Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. ๋„ 19 ๋ฐ ๋„ 20์—์„œ, ์ค‘์•™๋ถ€๊ฐ€ ์›€ํ‘น ๋“ค์–ด๊ฐ€๊ณ  ์ขŒ์šฐ์ธก์œผ๋กœ ๋ฒŒ์–ด์ง€๋Š” ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ๋ณด์—ฌ์ฃผ๋Š”๋ฐ, ์ด๋ฅผ ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™(batwing) ํŠน์„ฑ ๋˜๋Š” ์‚ฌ์ด๋“œ ์—๋ฏธํŒ…(side emitting) ํŠน์„ฑ์ด๋ผ๊ณ  ํ•œ๋‹ค. ๋ณดํ†ต, ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ(view angle)์ด๋ผ ํ•จ์€ ์„ผํ„ฐ(center) ์ง€์  ๋˜๋Š” ํœ˜๋„๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ€์žฅ ๋†’์€ ์ง€์ ์˜ ๊ฐ’์„ 1 ๋˜๋Š” 100%๋กœ ๋†“๊ณ  ์„ผํ„ฐ ๋˜๋Š” ํœ˜๋„๊ฐ€ ๊ฐ€์žฅ ๋†’์€ ์ง€์ ์— ๋Œ€ํ•ด ์ƒ๋Œ€์ ์œผ๋กœ 50%๊ฐ’์„ ๊ฐ€์ง€๋Š” ๋ฒ”์œ„๊นŒ์ง€๋ฅผ ์˜๋ฏธํ•œ๋‹ค.The light distribution module in polar coordinates based on a data sheet obtained by measuring the light output module 54 implemented as shown in FIG. 14 by using a goniometer (eg, OL770 goniometer) is shown in FIG. 19. In addition, a light distribution curve in the form of a rectangular coordinate based on a data sheet obtained by measuring the light output module 54 implemented as shown in FIG. 14 using a goniometer (eg, OL770 goniometer) is shown in FIG. 20. 19 and 20, it can be seen that the light output module 54 has a wide direct angle of about 170 degrees. 19 and 20, the center portion is pitted and shows a direction angle characteristic spreading left and right, which is referred to as a batwing characteristic or a side emitting characteristic. Usually, the view angle is defined as 1 or 100% of the center point or the point with the highest brightness, and reaches a range of 50% relative to the center or the point with the highest brightness. it means.
์ด์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์€ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์— ๋น„ํ•ด ๋ณด๋‹ค ๋„“์€ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๊ฐ–์Œ์„ ๋ฌผ๋ก  ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ์ง€๋‹Œ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ๊ฐ€์ง์„ ์•Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.As such, it can be seen that the light output module 54 has a wider direct angle as well as a direct angle having a batwing characteristic compared to the direct angle of the conventional LED package.
๋„ 21์€ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‘์šฉ์žฅ์น˜์˜ ์˜ˆ์ธ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์™€ ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์˜ ์ฐจ์ด์ ์„ ์„ค๋ช…ํ•˜๊ธฐ ์œ„ํ•œ ๋„๋ฉด์ด๋‹ค. (a)๋Š” ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์ด ์„ค์น˜๋œ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์ด๊ณ , (b)๋Š” ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์ด๋‹ค.21 is a view for explaining the difference between the backlight unit which is an example of the application of the present invention and the conventional backlight unit. (a) is a backlight unit according to the embodiment of the present invention in which the light output module 54 is installed, and (b) is a conventional backlight unit.
๋„ 21์˜ (a)์—์„œ์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด, ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์— ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ, ์ œ 2 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์„ ํฌํ•จ)์„ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋‚˜๋ž€ํžˆ ๋ฐฐ์น˜์‹œ์ผœ์„œ ๋™์ž‘์‹œํ‚ค๋ฉด ์ƒ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ ๋ฐ ์ขŒ์šฐ์ธก์˜ ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง์„ ์•Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค. As shown in (a) of FIG. 21, when the light emitting modules (including the first optical module and the second optical module) are arranged side by side in a row to operate on the base substrate, light output in the upper direction and the left and right sides is performed. It can be seen.
๋„ 21์˜ (b)๋Š” ๊ธฐ์กด์˜ 2๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€(์ฆ‰, ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€ ๊ตฌ์กฐ์ƒ ์ผ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๋งŒ์ด ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•จ)๋ฅผ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์—์„œ์ฒ˜๋Ÿผ ๋ˆ•ํ˜€์„œ ๋ฐฐ์น˜์‹œํ‚จ ํ›„์— ๋™์ž‘์‹œํ‚ค๋ฉด ์ขŒ์šฐ์ธก์˜ ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ๋งŒ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง„๋‹ค.FIG. 21 (b) shows that when two LED packages (ie, only one light exit in one direction of the package structure) are disposed side by side as in the light exit module of the present invention, the light exit only in the left and right sides. Is done.
์ฆ‰, ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ(54)์ด ์„ค์น˜๋œ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ์ƒ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ ๋ฐ ์ขŒ์šฐ์ธก์˜ ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง€๊ณ , ์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ์ขŒ์šฐ์ธก์˜ ์ธก๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ๋งŒ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ์ด๋ฃจ์–ด์ง„๋‹ค. That is, the backlight unit according to the embodiment of the present invention, in which the light output module 54 is installed, emits light in the upward direction and the left and right sides, and the conventional backlight unit emits light only in the left and right sides. .
์ข…๋ž˜์˜ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ์ƒ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ์˜ ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ๊ฐ€ ์•ˆ๋˜์–ด ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์žฅ์ถ•(์ฆ‰, ๋‘ ๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์‚ฌ์ด)์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์Œ์˜(์•”(ๆš—)๋ถ€๋ผ๊ณ ๋„ ํ•จ)์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•˜๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค.Conventional backlight units do not emit light in the upward direction so that shading (also called dark portions) occurs along the long axis of the base substrate (ie, between two LED packages).
๊ทธ๋Ÿฌ๋‚˜, ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ์— ๋”ฐ๋ฅธ ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ๋Š” ์ œ 1 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ ๋ฐ ์ œ 2 ๊ด‘ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์—์„œ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ์ถœ์‚ฌ๋˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์ด ์„œ๋กœ ์„ž์ด๊ฒŒ ๋˜์–ด ์Œ์˜์ด ๋ฐœ์ƒํ•˜์ง€ ์•Š๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ์ด๋Š” ์ข…๋ž˜์™€ ๋น„๊ตํ•˜์—ฌ ํ™”์งˆ์„ ํ–ฅ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ฌ ๋ฟ๋งŒ ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ์‹œ๊ฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ๋„ ์ข‹๊ณ  ์ œํ’ˆ์˜ ์‹ ๋ขฐ์„ฑ์„ ํ–ฅ์ƒ์‹œํ‚ค๊ฒŒ ๋œ๋‹ค. ๋˜ํ•œ, ๋„ 9์™€ ๊ฐ™์ด ๋ฐฐ์น˜์‹œํ‚จ ๊ฒƒ๊ณผ ๋น„๊ตํ•˜์—ฌ ๋ณด๋ฉด ๋„ 21์˜ (a)์™€ ๊ฐ™์€ ๋ฐฐ์น˜ ๊ตฌ์กฐ๊ฐ€ ๋ณด๋‹ค ๋ฉด๊ด‘์›์— ๊ฐ€๊นŒ์›€์„ ์•Œ ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๋‹ค.However, in the backlight unit according to the exemplary embodiment of the present invention, the light emitted upward from the first optical module and the second optical module are mixed with each other so that shading does not occur. This not only improves image quality as compared to the conventional art, but also improves the visual quality and reliability of the product. In addition, it can be seen that the arrangement structure as shown in FIG. 21A is closer to the surface light source as compared with the arrangement as shown in FIG. 9.
๋ฌผ๋ก , ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์—์„œ๋Š” ๊ด‘์ถœ์‚ฌ ๋ชจ๋“ˆ์ด ๋ฐฑ๋ผ์ดํŠธ ์œ ๋‹ˆํŠธ์— ์ฑ„์šฉ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜์˜€์œผ๋‚˜, ๋ฐฐํŠธ์œ™ ํŠน์„ฑ์„ ์ง€๋‹Œ ์ง€ํ–ฅ๊ฐ์„ ์š”๊ตฌํ•˜๋Š” ๊ด‘์›์ด ํ•„์š”ํ•œ ์กฐ๋ช…์žฅ์น˜ ๋“ฑ์—๋„ ์ถฉ๋ถ„ํžˆ ์ฑ„์šฉ๊ฐ€๋Šฅํ•˜๋‹ค.Of course, in the present invention, although the light emitting module is adopted in the backlight unit, it can be sufficiently employed in the lighting device that requires a light source requiring a directing angle having the batwing characteristics.
ํ•œํŽธ, ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์€ ์ƒ์ˆ ํ•œ ์‹ค์‹œ์˜ˆ๋กœ๋งŒ ํ•œ์ •๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์ด ์•„๋‹ˆ๋ผ ๋ณธ ๋ฐœ๋ช…์˜ ์š”์ง€๋ฅผ ๋ฒ—์–ด๋‚˜์ง€ ์•Š๋Š” ๋ฒ”์œ„๋‚ด์—์„œ ์ˆ˜์ • ๋ฐ ๋ณ€ํ˜•ํ•˜์—ฌ ์‹ค์‹œํ•  ์ˆ˜ ์žˆ๊ณ , ๊ทธ๋Ÿฌํ•œ ์ˆ˜์ • ๋ฐ ๋ณ€ํ˜•์ด ๊ฐ€ํ•ด์ง„ ๊ธฐ์ˆ ์‚ฌ์ƒ ์—ญ์‹œ ์ดํ•˜์˜ ํŠนํ—ˆ์ฒญ๊ตฌ๋ฒ”์œ„์— ์†ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์œผ๋กœ ๋ณด์•„์•ผ ํ•œ๋‹ค.On the other hand, the present invention is not limited only to the above-described embodiment, but can be modified and modified within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, and the technical spirit to which such modifications and variations are applied also belong to the following claims Must see

Claims (19)

  1. ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ์˜ค๋ชฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๊ธฐํŒ;A substrate on which a solder pad is recessed in a lower portion of a side surface;
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๋˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ์™€ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน; A pattern electrode formed on an upper surface of the substrate and electrically connected to the solder pads;
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ์‹ค์žฅ๋œ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž; ๋ฐA light emitting device mounted on an upper surface of the pattern electrode; And
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํƒ‘์žฌ๋˜์–ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž์—์„œ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋œ ๊ด‘์„ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.And a phosphor block mounted on an upper surface of the substrate and configured to emit light emitted from the light emitting device upwardly and laterally.
  2. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 1,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ™ˆ์˜ ๋ฒฝ๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ์˜ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๊ฐ€ ์ฝ”ํŒ…๋˜์–ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.The solder pad is an LED package, characterized in that formed by coating the material of the solder pad on the wall surface of the groove formed on the lower side of the substrate.
  3. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 1,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์—๋Š” ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๊ณ , A conductive pad is formed on the bottom of the substrate,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.The conductive package is an LED package, characterized in that electrically connected with the pattern electrode.
  4. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 1,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์„ ๋ฎ์Œ๊ณผ ๋”๋ถˆ์–ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ์„ ๋ฎ๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.The phosphor block covers the upper and the side of the light emitting device, and the LED package, characterized in that to cover the upper side of the pattern electrode.
  5. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 1,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์„ ๋ฎ๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.The phosphor block covers the upper and the side of the light emitting element and the pattern electrode.
  6. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 1์— ๊ธฐ์žฌ๋œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๊ฐ€ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์ƒ์— ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ ์„ค์น˜๋˜๋˜,A plurality of LED packages of claim 1 are installed on the base substrate,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ์ €๋ฉด์ด ์„œ๋กœ ๋Œ€ํ–ฅ๋˜๋„๋ก ์„ค์น˜๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์žฅ์น˜.The plurality of LED package is characterized in that the bottom surface is installed facing each other.
  7. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 6์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 6,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ๋‘ ๊ฐœ๊ฐ€ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์„ธํŠธ๋กœ ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์žฅ์น˜.And said plurality of LED packages are arranged in a row in a set of two.
  8. ๋‚ด๋ถ€์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ์–‘ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ ๋…ธ์ถœ๋œ ๊ธฐํŒ;A substrate having internal pads formed therein exposed to both sides thereof;
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๋˜ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ์™€ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน; A pattern electrode formed on an upper surface of the substrate and electrically connected to the inner pad;
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ์‹ค์žฅ๋œ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž; ๋ฐA light emitting device mounted on an upper surface of the pattern electrode; And
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํƒ‘์žฌ๋˜์–ด ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž์—์„œ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ๋œ ๊ด‘์„ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์œผ๋กœ ๋ฐฉ์ถœ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.And a phosphor block mounted on an upper surface of the substrate and configured to emit light emitted from the light emitting device upwardly and laterally.
  9. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 8,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์—๋Š” ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ๊ฐ€ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋˜๊ณ , A conductive pad is formed on the bottom of the substrate,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋„์ „ ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.The conductive package is an LED package, characterized in that electrically connected with the pattern electrode.
  10. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 8,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ์˜ค๋ชฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋ฅผ ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋กœ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๊ณ ,Further comprising a solder pad recessed in the lower portion of the side of the substrate,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.And the solder pad is electrically connected to the pattern electrode.
  11. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 10์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 10,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ํ™ˆ์˜ ๋ฒฝ๋ฉด์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ์˜ ์žฌ๋ฃŒ๊ฐ€ ์ฝ”ํŒ…๋˜์–ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€.The solder pad is an LED package, characterized in that formed by coating the material of the solder pad on the wall surface of the groove formed on the lower side of the substrate.
  12. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 8์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 8,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž ๋ฐ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฐฉ ๋ฐ ์ธก๋ฐฉ์„ ๋ฎ๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€. The phosphor block covers the upper and the side of the light emitting element and the pattern electrode.
  13. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 10์— ๊ธฐ์žฌ๋œ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๊ฐ€ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์ƒ์— ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ ์„ค์น˜๋˜๋˜,A plurality of LED packages of claim 10 are installed on the base substrate,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ์ €๋ฉด์ด ์„œ๋กœ ๋Œ€ํ–ฅ๋˜๋„๋ก ์„ค์น˜๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์žฅ์น˜.The plurality of LED package is characterized in that the bottom surface is installed facing each other.
  14. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 13์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 13,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ณต์ˆ˜๊ฐœ์˜ ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€๋Š” ๋‘ ๊ฐœ๊ฐ€ ํ•˜๋‚˜์˜ ์„ธํŠธ๋กœ ํ•˜์—ฌ ์ผ๋ ฌ๋กœ ๋ฐฐ์—ด๋œ ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์žฅ์น˜.And said plurality of LED packages are arranged in a row in a set of two.
  15. ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๋ณ„๋กœ, ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์ด ํ˜•์„ฑ๋œ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์„ ์ค€๋น„ํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ ์ค€๋น„ ๋‹จ๊ณ„;A base substrate preparation step of preparing a base substrate having a pattern electrode formed on an upper surface of each unit device region;
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ €๋ฉด์— ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ฒฝ๊ณ„์„ ์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ์„ ์†Œ์ • ๊นŠ์ด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ ํ˜•์„ฑ ๋‹จ๊ณ„; A splitting groove forming step of forming a splitting groove at a predetermined depth on a bottom surface of the base substrate along a boundary line between unit device regions;
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๋ณ„๋กœ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž๋ฅผ ํƒ‘์žฌํ•˜๋Š” ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž ํƒ‘์žฌ ๋‹จ๊ณ„; A light emitting device mounting step of mounting a light emitting device on an upper surface of the pattern electrode for each unit device region of the base substrate;
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฐœ๊ด‘์†Œ์ž๊ฐ€ ํƒ‘์žฌ๋œ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์— ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ํ˜•๊ด‘์ฒด ๋ธ”๋ก์„ ์ ์ธต์‹œ์ผœ ์ ์ธต์ฒด๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒฐํ•ฉ ๋‹จ๊ณ„;A bonding step of forming a laminate by stacking base phosphor blocks on an upper surface of the base substrate on which the light emitting device is mounted;
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ์ธต์ฒด์˜ ์ƒ๋ฉด์—์„œ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ๊ฐ„์˜ ๊ฒฝ๊ณ„์„ ์„ ๋”ฐ๋ผ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ์„ ์†Œ์ • ๊นŠ์ด๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋Š” ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ ํ˜•์„ฑ ๋‹จ๊ณ„; ๋ฐA cutting groove forming step of forming a cutting groove at a predetermined depth along a boundary line between unit device regions on an upper surface of the laminate; And
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ชผ๊ฐฌํ™ˆ๊ณผ ์ ˆ๋‹จํ™ˆ์„ ์ด์šฉํ•˜์—ฌ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์ ์ธต์ฒด๋ฅผ ๋ณต์ˆ˜์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž๋กœ ๊ฐ๊ฐ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌํ•˜๋Š” ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ๋‹จ๊ณ„๋ฅผ ํฌํ•จํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.And a separation step of separating the stack into a plurality of unit elements by using the split grooves and the cut grooves, respectively.
  16. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 15์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 15,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ ์ค€๋น„ ๋‹จ๊ณ„๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ฐ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž ์˜์—ญ์˜ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๋ผ๋ฆฌ ์„œ๋กœ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋˜๊ฒŒ ํ•˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•. The preparing of the base substrate is a method of manufacturing an LED package, characterized in that the pattern electrodes of each unit device region are separated from each other.
  17. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 15์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 15,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ ์ค€๋น„ ๋‹จ๊ณ„๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ๋‚ด๋ถ€์— ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์„ ๊ฐ€๋กœ์ง€๋ฅด๋Š” ๋ฐฉํ–ฅ์œผ๋กœ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ๋ฅผ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๊ณ , ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ์™€ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน์„ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์„œ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.The preparing of the base substrate may include forming an inner pad in a direction crossing the pattern electrode in the base substrate, and electrically connecting the inner pad and the pattern electrode to each other.
  18. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 17์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 17,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ ๋‹จ๊ณ„์— ์˜ํ•ด ๋ถ„๋ฆฌ๋œ ๊ฐ๊ฐ์˜ ๋‹จ์œ„ ์†Œ์ž์˜ ์–‘ ์ธก๋ฉด์œผ๋กœ, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ์˜ ์–‘๋‹จ์ด ๋…ธ์ถœ๋˜๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.A method of manufacturing an LED package, characterized in that both ends of the inner pad are exposed to both sides of each unit element separated by the separating step.
  19. ์ฒญ๊ตฌํ•ญ 17์— ์žˆ์–ด์„œ,The method according to claim 17,
    ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋ฒ ์ด์Šค ๊ธฐํŒ ์ค€๋น„ ๋‹จ๊ณ„๋Š” ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๊ธฐํŒ์˜ ์ธก๋ฉด์˜ ํ•˜๋ถ€์— ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋ฅผ ์˜ค๋ชฉํ•˜๊ฒŒ ์ถ”๊ฐ€๋กœ ํ˜•์„ฑํ•˜๋˜, ์ƒ๊ธฐ ์†”๋” ํŒจ๋“œ๋ฅผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ํŒจํ„ด ์ „๊ทน๊ณผ ์ƒ๊ธฐ ๋‚ด๋ถ€ ํŒจ๋“œ์™€ ์ „๊ธฐ์ ์œผ๋กœ ์„œ๋กœ ์—ฐ๊ฒฐ์‹œํ‚ค๋Š” ๊ฒƒ์„ ํŠน์ง•์œผ๋กœ ํ•˜๋Š” ์—˜์ด๋”” ํŒจํ‚ค์ง€์˜ ์ œ์กฐ๋ฐฉ๋ฒ•.The method of preparing the base substrate may further include forming concave solder pads on the lower side of the substrate, and electrically connecting the solder pads to the pattern electrodes and the inner pads.
PCT/KR2009/000363 2008-01-29 2009-01-23 Led package, and a production method therefor, and a device using the led package WO2009096685A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020080009216A KR20090083202A (en) 2008-01-29 2008-01-29 Led package and back light unit using the same
KR10-2008-0009216 2008-01-29
KR1020080044549A KR100978614B1 (en) 2008-05-14 2008-05-14 LED package and method of manufacturing a LED package
KR10-2008-0044549 2008-05-14
KR10-2008-0066941 2008-07-10
KR1020080066941A KR20100006810A (en) 2008-07-10 2008-07-10 Light emitting module and back light unit using the same

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009096685A2 true WO2009096685A2 (en) 2009-08-06
WO2009096685A3 WO2009096685A3 (en) 2009-10-22

Family

ID=40913398

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2009/000363 WO2009096685A2 (en) 2008-01-29 2009-01-23 Led package, and a production method therefor, and a device using the led package

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2009096685A2 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, โ€  Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9765949B2 (en) 2013-07-26 2017-09-19 Bright View Technologies Corporation Shaped microstructure-based optical diffusers for creating batwing and other lighting patterns
US10072816B2 (en) 2013-06-19 2018-09-11 Bright View Technologies Corporation Microstructure-based optical diffusers for creating batwing and other lighting patterns
US10302275B2 (en) 2013-06-19 2019-05-28 Bright View Technologies Corporation Microstructure-based diffusers for creating batwing lighting patterns

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, โ€  Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003078176A (en) * 2001-09-06 2003-03-14 Sharp Corp Side multicolor emission type surface-mounted led
JP2006114854A (en) * 2004-10-18 2006-04-27 Sharp Corp Semiconductor light emitting device, and backlight device for liquid crystal display
KR20070095664A (en) * 2006-03-22 2007-10-01 (์ฃผ) ์•„๋ชจ์„ผ์Šค Led package
KR20080006052A (en) * 2006-07-11 2008-01-16 ์•Œํ‹ฐ์ „์ž ์ฃผ์‹ํšŒ์‚ฌ Led package of side view type

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, โ€  Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003078176A (en) * 2001-09-06 2003-03-14 Sharp Corp Side multicolor emission type surface-mounted led
JP2006114854A (en) * 2004-10-18 2006-04-27 Sharp Corp Semiconductor light emitting device, and backlight device for liquid crystal display
KR20070095664A (en) * 2006-03-22 2007-10-01 (์ฃผ) ์•„๋ชจ์„ผ์Šค Led package
KR20080006052A (en) * 2006-07-11 2008-01-16 ์•Œํ‹ฐ์ „์ž ์ฃผ์‹ํšŒ์‚ฌ Led package of side view type

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, โ€  Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10072816B2 (en) 2013-06-19 2018-09-11 Bright View Technologies Corporation Microstructure-based optical diffusers for creating batwing and other lighting patterns
US10302275B2 (en) 2013-06-19 2019-05-28 Bright View Technologies Corporation Microstructure-based diffusers for creating batwing lighting patterns
US9765949B2 (en) 2013-07-26 2017-09-19 Bright View Technologies Corporation Shaped microstructure-based optical diffusers for creating batwing and other lighting patterns

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2009096685A3 (en) 2009-10-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9966504B2 (en) Light emitting device and method for manufacturing the same
WO2009142391A2 (en) Light-emitting device package and method of manufacturing the same
WO2016137056A1 (en) Transparent electric-lighting apparatus
WO2012077884A1 (en) Method of fabricating semiconductor device using gang bonding and semiconductor device fabricated by the same
WO2012108636A2 (en) Light emitting device having wavelength converting layer
WO2015141989A1 (en) Lighting device
JP5499960B2 (en) Element substrate, light emitting device
WO2011118934A2 (en) Light emitting diode device and lighting device using the same
WO2020004845A1 (en) Flexible lighting device and display panel using micro led chips
WO2013024916A1 (en) Wavelength conversion chip for a light emitting diode, and method for manufacturing same
WO2009096685A2 (en) Led package, and a production method therefor, and a device using the led package
WO2016018071A1 (en) Light source module
WO2010074479A2 (en) Led package, method for manufacturing an led package, backlight unit, and lighting apparatus
WO2016013904A1 (en) Printed circuit board
US9743521B2 (en) Light-source module and light-emitting device
WO2017150804A1 (en) Light emitting diode, method for manufacturing light emitting diode, light emitting diode display device, and method for manufacturing light emitting diode display device
WO2016204504A1 (en) Surface mounting component module
WO2013133473A1 (en) Led lamp module having heatsink board structure and method of manufacturing same
WO2016122053A1 (en) Transparent electric lighting device
KR20090083202A (en) Led package and back light unit using the same
WO2011129615A2 (en) Light-emitting module and method for manufacturing the light-emitting module
KR100978614B1 (en) LED package and method of manufacturing a LED package
WO2017026858A1 (en) Light emitting element package
KR20100006810A (en) Light emitting module and back light unit using the same
WO2020060053A1 (en) Light-emitting device package capable of implementing surface light source, light-emitting module, and manufacturing method therefor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 09706392

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 09706392

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2